AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

C TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION AT B

AT

E
CONTENTS
INDEX FOR DTC ........................................................ 5 How To Perform Trouble Diagnosis For Quick and F
Alphabetical Index .................................................... 5 Accurate Repair ...................................................... 45
DTC No. Index ......................................................... 6 A/T Electrical Parts Location .................................. 50
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 7 Circuit Diagram ....................................................... 51 G
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis .................... 52
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- Check Before Engine is Started .............................. 56
SIONER” .................................................................. 7 Check at Idle ........................................................... 57
H
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Cruise Test - Part 1 ................................................. 58
of A/T and Engine .................................................... 7 Cruise Test - Part 2 ................................................. 60
Precautions .............................................................. 8 Cruise Test - Part 3 ................................................. 61
Service Notice or Precautions .................................. 9 Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs ....... 63 I
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 9 Vehicle Speed at Which Lock-up Occurs/Releases... 64
PREPARATION ......................................................... 10 Symptom Chart ....................................................... 65
Special Service Tools ............................................. 10 TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values ........... 90 J
Commercial Service Tools .......................................11 CONSULT-II Function (A/T) .................................... 91
A/T FLUID ................................................................. 12 Diagnostic Procedure without CONSULT-II .......... 104
Changing A/T Fluid ................................................ 12 DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE ............ 107
K
Checking A/T Fluid ................................................. 13 Description ............................................................ 107
A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning ...................................... 15 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 107
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM .......................................... 18 Possible Cause ..................................................... 107
Cross-Sectional View (2WD Models) ..................... 18 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 107 L
Cross-Sectional View (AWD Models) ..................... 19 Wiring Diagram — AT — CAN .............................. 108
Shift Mechanism ..................................................... 20 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 109
TCM Function ......................................................... 31 DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................... 110 M
CAN Communication .............................................. 32 Description ............................................................ 110
Input/Output Signal of TCM .................................... 32 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 110
Line Pressure Control ............................................ 33 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 110
Shift Control ........................................................... 34 Possible Cause ..................................................... 110
Lock-Up Control ..................................................... 35 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 110
Engine Brake Control ............................................. 36 Wiring Diagram — AT — STSIG ...........................111
Control Valve .......................................................... 37 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 112
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ............ 39 DTC P0700 TCM ..................................................... 114
Introduction ............................................................ 39 Description ............................................................ 114
OBD-II Function for A/T System ............................. 39 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 114
One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II ............ 39 Possible Cause ..................................................... 114
OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ................. 39 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 114
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ........................... 42 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 114
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ............................................ 43 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH. 115
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ................................ 43 Description ............................................................ 115
Fail-Safe ................................................................. 43 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 115

Edition: 2004 August AT-1 2005 FX

 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 115 CONSULT-II Reference Value ............................... 134
Possible Cause ..................................................... 115 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 134
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 115 Possible Cause ..................................................... 134
Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW ....................... 116 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 134
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 117 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 135
DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REV- DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
OLUTION SENSOR) ............................................... 119 CIRCUIT .................................................................. 137
Description ............................................................ 119 Description ............................................................ 137
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 119 CONSULT-II Reference Value ............................... 137
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 119 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 137
Possible Cause ..................................................... 119 Possible Cause ..................................................... 137
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 119 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 137
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T ......................... 121 Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS ............................... 138
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 122 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 139
DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL ................... 124 Component Inspection .......................................... 141
Description ............................................................ 124 DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR .... 142
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 124 Description ............................................................ 142
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 124 CONSULT-II Reference Value ............................... 142
Possible Cause ..................................................... 124 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 142
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 124 Possible Cause ..................................................... 142
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 125 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 142
DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 143
SOLENOID VALVE ................................................. 126 DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR ....... 144
Description ............................................................ 126 Description ............................................................ 144
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 126 CONSULT-II Reference Value ............................... 144
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 126 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 144
Possible Cause ..................................................... 126 Possible Cause ..................................................... 144
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 126 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 144
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 127 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 145
DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP). 128 DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK ................................. 146
Description ............................................................ 128 Description ............................................................ 146
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 128 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 146
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 128 Possible Cause ..................................................... 146
Possible Cause ..................................................... 128 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 146
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 128 Judgement of A/T Interlock ................................... 146
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 129 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 147
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE. 130 DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING ............... 149
Description ............................................................ 130 Description ............................................................ 149
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 130 CONSULT-II Reference Value ............................... 149
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 130 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 149
Possible Cause ..................................................... 130 Possible Cause ..................................................... 149
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 130 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 149
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 131 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 150
DTC P1702 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE . 151
(RAM) ...................................................................... 132 Description ............................................................ 151
Description ............................................................ 132 CONSULT-II Reference Value ............................... 151
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 132 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 151
Possible Cause ..................................................... 132 Possible Cause ..................................................... 151
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 132 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 151
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 132 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 152
DTC P1703 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
(ROM) ...................................................................... 133 FUNCTION .............................................................. 153
Description ............................................................ 133 Description ............................................................ 153
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 133 CONSULT-II Reference Value ............................... 153
Possible Cause ..................................................... 133 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 153
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 133 Possible Cause ..................................................... 153
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 133 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 153
DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR ....... 134 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 154
Description ............................................................ 134 DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE ... 155

Edition: 2004 August AT-2 2005 FX

 Description ........................................................... 155 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 169
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 155 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 170 A
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 155 DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH .................. 171
Possible Cause .................................................... 155 Description ............................................................ 171
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 155 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode B
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 156 . 171
DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 171
FUNCTION .............................................................. 157 Possible Cause ..................................................... 171
Description ........................................................... 157 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 171 AT
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 157 Wiring Diagram — AT — MMSW ......................... 172
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 157 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 174
Possible Cause .................................................... 157 Component Inspection .......................................... 175 D
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 157 DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1 ............... 176
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 158 Description ............................................................ 176
DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE. 159 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 176 E
Description ........................................................... 159 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 176
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 159 Possible Cause ..................................................... 176
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 159 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 176
Possible Cause .................................................... 159 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 177 F
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 159 DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3 ............... 178
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 160 Description ............................................................ 178
DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 178 G
FUNCTION .............................................................. 161 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 178
Description ........................................................... 161 Possible Cause ..................................................... 178
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 161 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 178 H
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 161 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 179
Possible Cause .................................................... 161 DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5 ............... 180
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 161 Description ............................................................ 180
I
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 162 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 180
DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 180
SOLENOID VALVE ................................................. 163 Possible Cause ..................................................... 180
Description ........................................................... 163 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 180 J
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 163 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 181
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 163 DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6 ............... 182
Possible Cause .................................................... 163 Description ............................................................ 182 K
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 163 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 182
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 164 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 182
DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH Possible Cause ..................................................... 182 L
SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION ............................. 165 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 182
Description ........................................................... 165 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 183
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 165 MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT. 184
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 165 Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN ............................ 184 M
Possible Cause .................................................... 165 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 185
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 165 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION AND WIDE OPEN
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 166 THROTTLE POSITION CIRCUIT ............................ 188
DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 188
VALVE ..................................................................... 167 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 188
Description ........................................................... 167 BRAKE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ...................................... 189
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 167 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 189
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 167 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 189
Possible Cause .................................................... 167 A/T INDICATOR CIRCUIT ....................................... 190
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 167 Description ............................................................ 190
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 168 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 190
DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 190
VALVE FUNCTION ................................................. 169 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS ............ 191
Description ........................................................... 169 Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC ...................... 191
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 169 A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On . 194
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 169 Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position . 195
Possible Cause .................................................... 169 In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed ...... 196

Edition: 2004 August AT-3 2005 FX

 In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves .............................. 197 Only) ..................................................................... 264
Large Shock (“N” to “D” Position) ......................... 198 AIR BREATHER HOSE ........................................... 269
Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position. 201 Removal and Installation ....................................... 269
Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position . 204 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY ................................. 271
Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ..................... 206 Removal and Installation (2WD Models) ............... 271
A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 ................................ 209 Removal and Installation (AWD Models) .............. 274
A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 ................................ 211 OVERHAUL ............................................................. 279
A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 ................................ 213 Components .......................................................... 279
A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D5 ................................ 216 Oil Channel ........................................................... 287
A/T Does Not Perform Lock-Up ............................ 218 Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings,
A/T Does Not Hold Lock-Up Condition ................. 220 Thrust Washers and Snap Rings .......................... 289
Lock-Up Is Not Released ...................................... 222 DISASSEMBLY ....................................................... 291
Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle ................ 222 Disassembly .......................................................... 291
Cannot Be Changed to Manual Mode .................. 224 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS ...................... 309
A/T Does Not Shift: 5th Gear → 4th Gear ............ 224 Oil Pump ............................................................... 309
A/T Does Not Shift: 4th Gear → 3rd Gear ............ 226 Front Sun Gear, 3rd One-Way Clutch ................... 312
A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd Gear → 2nd Gear ........... 228 Front Carrier, Input Clutch, Rear Internal Gear ..... 314
A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd Gear → 1st Gear ............ 230 Mid Sun Gear, Rear Sun Gear, High and Low
Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake .... 232 Reverse Clutch Hub .............................................. 319
SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM .................................... 234 High and Low Reverse Clutch .............................. 324
Control Device Removal and Installation .............. 234 Direct Clutch ......................................................... 327
Control Rod Removal and Installation .................. 235 ASSEMBLY ............................................................. 329
Adjustment of A/T Position ................................... 236 Assembly (1) ......................................................... 329
Checking of A/T Position ...................................... 236 Adjustment ............................................................ 342
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ..................................... 237 Assembly (2) ......................................................... 345
Description ............................................................ 237 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 352
Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location ......... 237 General Specifications .......................................... 352
Wiring Diagram — AT — SHIFT ........................... 238 Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs ...... 352
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 239 Vehicle Speed at Which Lock-Up Occurs/Releases.353
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE ...................................... 241 Stall Speed ............................................................ 353
Components ......................................................... 241 Line Pressure ........................................................ 353
Removal and Installation ...................................... 242 A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor .............................. 353
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE .......................................... 244 Turbine Revolution Sensor .................................... 354
Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Vehicle Speed Sensor A/T (Revolution Sensor) ... 354
Sensor 2 ............................................................... 244 Reverse Brake ...................................................... 354
Parking Components (2WD Models Only) ............ 256 Total End Play ....................................................... 354
Rear Oil Seal ........................................................ 263
Revolution Sensor Components (2WD Models

Edition: 2004 August AT-4 2005 FX

 INDEX FOR DTC

INDEX FOR DTC PFP:00024

A
Alphabetical Index ACS002L1

NOTE:
If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to B
AT-107 .
DTC
Items AT
OBD-II Except OBD-II Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
CONSULT-II GST (*1) CONSULT-II only “A/T”
A/T 1ST E/BRAKING — P1731 AT-149
D
ATF PRES SW 1/CIRC — P1841 AT-176
ATF PRES SW 3/CIRC — P1843 AT-178
ATF PRES SW 5/CIRC — P1845 AT-180 E
ATF PRES SW 6/CIRC — P1846 AT-182
A/T INTERLOCK P1730 P1730 AT-146
F
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 P0744 AT-128
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 P1710 AT-137
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 U1000 AT-107 G
D/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1762 P1762 AT-159
D/C SOLENOID FNCTN P1764 (*3) P1764 AT-161
ENGINE SPEED SIG P0725 (*2) P0725 AT-124
H
FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1757 P1757 AT-155
FR/B SOLENOID FNCT P1759 P1759 AT-157
I
HLR/C SOL/CIRC P1767 P1767 AT-163
HLR/C SOL FNCTN P1769 (*3) P1769 AT-165
I/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1752 P1752 AT-151 J
I/C SOLENOID FNCTN P1754 (*3) P1754 AT-153
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 P0745 AT-130
K
LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1772 P1772 AT-167
LC/B SOLENOID FNCT P1774 P1774 AT-169
MANU MODE SW/CIR — P1815 AT-171 L
PNP SW/CIRC P0705 P0705 AT-115
STARTER RELAY/CIRC — P0615 AT-110
M
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 P0740 AT-126
TCM P0700(*2) P0700 AT-114
TCM·RAM — P1702 AT-132
TCM·ROM — P1703 AT-133
TP SEN/CIRC A/T P1705(*2) P1705 AT-134
TURBINE REV S/CIRC P1716 P1716 AT-142
VEH SPD SE/CIR·MTR — P1721 AT-144
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT P0720 P0720 AT-119
*1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.
*2: For VQ35DE engine.
*3: These malfunctions cannot be displayed MIL if another malfunction is assigned to MIL.

Edition: 2004 August AT-5 2005 FX

 INDEX FOR DTC

DTC No. Index ACS002L2

NOTE:
If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to
AT-107 .
DTC
OBD-II Except OBD-II Items
Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
CONSULT-II CONSULT-II
GST (*1) only “A/T”
— P0615 STARTER RELAY/CIRC AT-110
P0700(*2) P0700 TCM AT-114
P0705 P0705 PNP SW/CIRC AT-115
P0710 P1710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC AT-137
P0720 P0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT AT-119
P0725 (*2) P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG AT-124
P0740 P0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC AT-126
P0744 P0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN AT-128
P0745 P0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC AT-130
— P1702 TCM·RAM AT-132
— P1703 TCM·ROM AT-133
P1705 (*2) P1705 TP SEN/CIRC A/T AT-134
P1716 P1716 TURBINE REV S/CIRC AT-142
— P1721 VEH SPD SE/CIR·MTR AT-144
P1730 P1730 A/T INTERLOCK AT-146
— P1731 A/T 1ST E/BRAKING AT-149
P1752 P1752 I/C SOLENOID/CIRC AT-151
P1754 (*3) P1754 I/C SOLENOID FNCTN AT-153
P1757 P1757 FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC AT-155
P1759 (*3) P1759 FR/B SOLENOID FNCT AT-157
P1762 P1762 D/C SOLENOID/CIRC AT-159
P1764 (*3) P1764 D/C SOLENOID FNCTN AT-161
P1767 P1767 HLR/C SOL/CIRC AT-163
P1769 P1769 HLR/C SOL FNCTN AT-165
P1772 P1772 LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC AT-167
P1774 P1774 LC/B SOLENOID FNCT AT-169
— P1815 MANU MODE SW/CIRC AT-171
— P1841 ATF PRES SW 1/CIRC AT-176
— P1843 ATF PRES SW 3/CIRC AT-178
— P1845 ATF PRES SW 5/CIRC AT-180
— P1846 ATF PRES SW 6/CIRC AT-182
U1000 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT AT-107
*1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.
*2: For VQ35DE engine.
*3: These malfunctions cannot be displayed MIL if another malfunction is assigned to MIL.

Edition: 2004 August AT-6 2005 FX

 PRECAUTIONS

PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001
A
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER” ACS002L3

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along B
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front AT
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Man-
ual.
WARNING: D
● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be per-
formed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. E
● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to per-
sonal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section. F
● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
G
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of A/T and Engine ACS002L5

The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration. H
CAUTION:
● Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative termi-
nal before any repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, sole- I
noid valves, etc. Will cause the MIL to light up.
● Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to an open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease, J
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
● Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. Interference of the harness with a
bracket, etc. May cause the MIL to light up due to a short circuit. K
● Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MIL to light up due to a malfunction of the EGR system or fuel injection system, etc.
● Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the TCM and L
ECM before returning the vehicle to the customer.

Edition: 2004 August AT-7 2005 FX

 PRECAUTIONS

Precautions ACS002L6

● Before connecting or disconnecting the A/T assembly har-

ness connector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect
the battery cable from the negative terminal. Because bat-
tery voltage is applied to TCM even if ignition switch is
turned OFF.

SEF289H

● After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform

“DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) Confirmation Procedure”.
If the repair is completed the DTC should not be displayed
in the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.

SEF217U

● Always use the specified brand of ATF. Refer to MA-12, "Fluids and Lubricants" .
● Use paper rags not cloth rags during work.
● After replacing the ATF, dispose of the waste oil using the methods prescribed by law, ordinance, etc.
● Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the transmission. It is important to
prevent the internal parts from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter.
● Disassembly should be done in a clean work area.
● Use lint-free cloth or towels for wiping parts clean. Common shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere
with the operation of the transmission.
● Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper assembly.
● All parts should be carefully cleansed with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent before inspection or
reassembly.
● Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the transmission is disassembled.
● It is very important to perform functional tests whenever they are indicated.
● The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme care when parts are removed and serviced.
Place disassembled valve body parts in order for easier and proper assembly. Care will also prevent
springs and small parts from becoming scattered or lost.
● Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along bores in valve body under their own weight.
● Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings
and seals, or hold bearings and washers in place during assembly. Do not use grease.
● Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings, seals and gaskets when assembling.
● After overhaul, refill the transmission with new ATF.
● When the A/T drain plug is removed, only some of the fluid is drained. Old A/T fluid will remain in torque
converter and ATF cooling system.
Always follow the procedures under “Changing A/T Fluid” in the AT section when changing A/T fluid. Refer
to AT-12, "Changing A/T Fluid" , AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .

Edition: 2004 August AT-8 2005 FX

 PRECAUTIONS

Service Notice or Precautions ACS002L7

ATF COOLER SERVICE A

If A/T fluid contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.), or if an A/T is repaired, overhauled, or replaced,
inspect and clean the A/T fluid cooler mounted in the radiator or replace the radiator. Flush cooler lines using
cleaning solvent and compressed air after repair. For A/T fluid cooler cleaning procedure, refer to AT-15, "A/T B
Fluid Cooler Cleaning" . For radiator replacement, refer to CO-14, "RADIATOR" (for VQ35DE), CO-41,
"RADIATOR" (for VK45DE).
OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSIS AT
● A/T self-diagnosis is performed by the TCM in combination with the ECM. The results can be read through
the blinking pattern of the A/T CHECK indicator or the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). Refer to the table
on AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" for the indicator used to display each self-diagnostic D
result.
● The self-diagnostic results indicated by the MIL are automatically stored in both the ECM and TCM mem-
ories. E
Always perform the procedure on AT-40, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" to complete the repair and avoid
unnecessary blinking of the MIL.
For details of OBD-II, refer to EC-54, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM" (for VQ35DE) or EC-745,
F
"ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM" (for VK45DE).
● Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use the new style slide-
locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-74, "HAR-
NESS CONNECTOR" . G

Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis ACS002L8

When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: H

● GI-15, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams".
● PG-3, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" for power distribution circuit.
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: I
● GI-11, "How to Follow Trouble Diagnoses".
● GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident".
J

Edition: 2004 August AT-9 2005 FX

 PREPARATION

PREPARATION PFP:00002

Special Service Tools ACS002L9

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.) Description
Tool name

ST2505S001 Measuring line pressure

(J-34301-C)
Oil pressure gauge set
1 ST25051001
( — )
Oil pressure gauge
2 ST25052000
( — )
Hose
3 ST25053000
( — )
Joint pipe
4 ST25054000 ZZA0600D

( — )
Adapter
5 ST25055000
( — )
Adapter
KV31103600 Measuring line pressure
(J-45674)
Joint pipe adapter
(With ST25054000)

ZZA1227D

ST33400001 ● Installing rear oil seal (2WD models)

(J-26082) ● Installing oil pump housing oil seal
Drift
a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
b: 47 mm (1.85 in) dia.

NT086

KV31102400 Installing reverse brake return spring retainer

(J-34285 and J-34285-87)
Clutch spring compressor
a: 320 mm (12.60 in)
b: 174 mm (6.85 in)

NT423

ST25850000 Removing oil pump assembly

(J-25721-A)
Sliding hammer
a: 179 mm (7.05 in)
b: 70 mm (2.76 in)
c: 40 mm (1.57 in)
d: M12X1.75P
NT422

Edition: 2004 August AT-10 2005 FX

 PREPARATION

Commercial Service Tools ACS002LA

A
Tool name Description

Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts

B

AT

PBIC0190E

Drift Installing manual shaft oil seals D

a: 22 mm (0.87 in) dia.

NT083

F
Drift Installing rear oil seal (AWD models)
a: 64 mm (2.52 in) dia.

SCIA5338E H

Edition: 2004 August AT-11 2005 FX

 A/T FLUID

A/T FLUID PFP:KLE40

Changing A/T Fluid ACS002LB

1. Warm up A/T fluid.

2. Stop engine.
3. Loosen the level gauge bolt.
4. Drain A/T fluid from drain plug and refill with new A/T fluid.
Always refill same volume with drained fluid.
● To replace the A/T fluid, pour in new fluid at the A/T fluid
charging pipe with the engine idling, at the same time drain
the old fluid from the radiator cooler hose return side.
● When the color of the fluid coming out is almost same as the
color of the new fluid, the replacement is complete. The
amount of new A/T fluid to use should be 30 to 50% of the
stipulated amount.
SCIA4896E

A/T fluid: Nissan Matic J ATF

Fluid capacity: 10.3 (10-7/8 US qt, 9-1/8 lmp qt)
CAUTION:
● Use only Genuine Nissan Matic J ATF. Do not mix with other fluid.

● Using A/T fluid other than Genuine Nissan Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability
and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is
not covered by the warranty.
● When filling A/T fluid, take care not to scatter heat generating parts such as exhaust.

● Do not reuse drain plug gasket.

Drain plug:
: 34 N·m (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb)

5. Run engine at idle speed for 5 minutes.

6. Check A/T fluid level and condition. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" . If A/T fluid is still dirty, repeat
step 2. through 5.
7. Install the removed A/T fluid level gauge into A/T fluid charging pipe.
8. Tighten the level gauge bolt.
Level gauge bolt:
: 5.1 N·m (0.52 kg-m, 45 in-lb)

Edition: 2004 August AT-12 2005 FX

 A/T FLUID

Checking A/T Fluid ACS002LC

A
1. Warm up engine.
2. Check for fluid leakage.
3. Loosen the level gauge bolt.
B
4. Before driving, fluid level can be checked at fluid temperatures
of 30 to 50°C (86 to 122°F) using “COLD” range on A/T fluid
level gauge as follows.
AT
a. Park vehicle on level surface and set parking brake.
b. Start engine and move selector lever through each gear posi-
tion. Leave selector lever in P position.
D
c. Check fluid level with engine idling.
d. Remove A/T fluid level gauge and wipe clean with lint-free
paper.
E
CAUTION: SCIA4835E
When wiping away the A/T fluid level gauge, always use
lint-free paper, not a cloth one.
F
e. Re-insert A/T fluid level gauge into A/T fluid charging pipe as far as it will go.
CAUTION:
To check A/T fluid level, insert the A/T fluid level gauge until the cap contacts the end of the charg-
ing pipe, with the gauge reversed from the normal attachment conditions. G
f. Remove A/T fluid level gauge and note reading. If reading is at low side of range, add fluid to the charging
pipe.
H
CAUTION:
Do not overfill.
5. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas.
I
6. Make the fluid temperature approximately 65°C (149°F).
NOTE:
Fluid level will be greatly affected by temperature as shown in figure. Therefore, be certain to per-
form operation while checking data with CONSULT-II. J

SLIA0016E

a. Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector.

b. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
c. Read out the value of “ATF TEMP 1”.
7. Recheck fluid level at fluid temperatures of approximately 65°C (149°F) using “HOT” range on A/T fluid
level gauge.

Edition: 2004 August AT-13 2005 FX

 A/T FLUID

CAUTION:
● When wiping away the A/T fluid level gauge, always use lint-free paper, not a cloth one.

● To check fluid level, insert the A/T fluid level gauge until
the cap contacts the end of the A/T fluid charging pipe,
with the gauge reversed from the normal attachment con-
ditions as shown.
8. Check fluid condition.
● If fluid is very dark or smells burned, check operation of A/T.
Flush cooling system after repair of A/T.
● If A/T fluid contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.),
replace radiator and flush cooler line using cleaning solvent
and compressed air after repair of A/T. Refer to CO-14,
"RADIATOR" (for VQ35DE) or CO-41, "RADIATOR" (for SCIA2899E

VK45DE) and AT-15, "A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning" .

9. Install the removed A/T fluid level gauge in the A/T fluid charging
pipe.
10. Tighten level gauge bolt.
Level gauge bolt:
: 5.1 N·m (0.52 kg-m, 45 in-lb)

SCIA4896E

Edition: 2004 August AT-14 2005 FX

 A/T FLUID

A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning ACS004Q5

A
Whenever an automatic transmission is replaced, the A/T fluid cooler mounted in the radiator must be
inspected and cleaned.
Metal debris and friction material, if present, can become trapped in the A/T fluid cooler. This debris can con-
taminate the newly serviced A/T or, in severe cases, can block or restrict the flow of A/T fluid. In either case, B
malfunction of the newly serviced A/T may result.
Debris, if present, may build up as A/T fluid enters the cooler inlet. It will be necessary to back flush the cooler
through the cooler outlet in order to flush out any built up debris. AT
A/T FLUID COOLER CLEANING PROCEDURE
1. Position an oil pan under the automatic transmission's inlet and outlet cooler hoses.
2. Identify the inlet and outlet fluid cooler hoses. D
3. Disconnect the fluid cooler inlet and outlet rubber hoses from the
steel cooler tubes or bypass valve.
NOTE: E
Replace the cooler hoses if rubber material from the hose
remains on the tube fitting.
4. Allow any A/T fluid that remains in the cooler hoses to drain into F
the oil pan.

G
SCIA3830E

H
5. Insert the extension adapter hose of a can of Transmission
Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM006) into the cooler out-
let hose.
CAUTION: I
● Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying
the Transmission Cooler Cleaner.
● Spray cooler cleaner only with adequate ventilation. J
● Avoid contact with eyes and skin.

● Do not breath vapors or spray mist.

K
6. Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmis- SCIA3831E
sion Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler outlet
hose until fluid flows out of the cooler inlet hose for 5 seconds.
7. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler outlet hose. L
8. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and of the cooler outlet
hose.
M
9. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 - 9 kg/cm2 (70 - 130 psi)
through the cooler outlet hose for 10 seconds to force out any
remaining fluid.
10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 three additional times.
11. Position an oil pan under the banjo bolts that connect the fluid
cooler steel lines to the transmission.
12. Remove the banjo bolts. SCIA3832E

13. Flush each steel line from the cooler side back toward the trans-
mission by spraying Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream for 5 seconds.
14. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 - 9 kg/cm2 (70 - 130 psi) through each steel line from the cooler side
back toward the transmission for 10 seconds to force out any remaining fluid.
15. Ensure all debris is removed from the steel cooler lines.
16. Ensure all debris is removed from the banjo bolts and fittings.
17. Perform AT-16, "A/T FLUID COOLER DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" .

Edition: 2004 August AT-15 2005 FX

 A/T FLUID

A/T FLUID COOLER DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE

NOTE:
Insufficient cleaning of the cooler inlet hose exterior may lead to inaccurate debris identification.
1. Position an oil pan under the automatic transmission's inlet and outlet cooler hoses.
2. Clean the exterior and tip of the cooler inlet hose.
3. Insert the extension adapter hose of a can of Transmission
Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM006) into the cooler out-
let hose.
CAUTION:
● Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying
the Transmission Cooler Cleaner.
● Spray cooler cleaner only with adequate ventilation.

● Avoid contact with eyes and skin.

● Do not breath vapors or spray mist.

4. Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmis- SCIA3831E
sion Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler outlet
hose until fluid flows out of the cooler inlet hose for 5 seconds.
5. Tie a common white, basket-type coffee filter to the end of the
cooler inlet hose.

SCIA3833E

6. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler outlet hose.
7. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and end of cooler outlet
hose.
8. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 - 9 kg/cm2 (70 - 130 psi)
through the cooler outlet hose to force any remaining A/T fluid
into the coffee filter.
9. Remove the coffee filter from the end of the cooler inlet hose.
10. Perform AT-17, "A/T FLUID COOLER INSPECTION PROCE-
DURE" .
SCIA3834E

Edition: 2004 August AT-16 2005 FX

 A/T FLUID

A/T FLUID COOLER INSPECTION PROCEDURE

1. Inspect the coffee filter for debris. A
a. If small metal debris less than 1mm (0.040 in) in size or metal
powder is found in the coffee filter, this is normal. If normal
debris is found, the A/T fluid cooler/radiator can be re-used and B
the procedure is ended.

AT

SCIA2967E
D

b. If one or more pieces of debris are found that are over 1mm
(0.040 in) in size and/or peeled clutch facing material is found in E
the coffee filter, the fluid cooler is not serviceable. The A/T fluid
cooler/radiator must be replaced and the inspection procedure is
[Link] to CO-14, "RADIATOR" and CO-17, "RADIATOR
(ALUMINUM TYPE)" (for VQ35DE), CO-41, "RADIATOR" and F
CO-45, "RADIATOR (ALUMINUM TYPE)" (for VK45DE).

SCIA5257E

A/T FLUID COOLER FINAL INSPECTION H

After performing all procedures, ensure that all remaining oil is cleaned from all components.

Edition: 2004 August AT-17 2005 FX

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:31036

Cross-Sectional View (2WD Models) ACS002LD

SCIA5262E

1. Front planetary gear 2. Mid planetary gear 3. Rear planetary gear

4. Direct clutch 5. High and low reverse clutch 6. Reverse brake
7. Drum support 8. Forward brake 9. Low coast brake
10. Input shaft 11. Torque converter 12. Oil pump
13. Front brake 14. 3rd one-way clutch 15. Input clutch
16. 1st one-way clutch 17. Control valve with TCM 18. Forward one-way clutch
19. Rear extension 20. Output shaft

Edition: 2004 August AT-18 2005 FX

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

Cross-Sectional View (AWD Models) ACS0033B

AT

I
SCIA5263E

1. Front planetary gear 2. Mid planetary gear 3. Rear planetary gear

4. Direct clutch 5. High and low reverse clutch 6. Reverse brake
J
7. Drum support 8. Forward brake 9. Low coast brake
10. Input shaft 11. Torque converter 12. Oil pump
13. Front brake 14. 3rd one-way clutch 15. Input clutch
K
16. 1st one-way clutch 17. Control valve with TCM 18. Forward one-way clutch
19. Adapter case 20. Output shaft

Edition: 2004 August AT-19 2005 FX

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

Shift Mechanism ACS002LE

The automatic transmission uses compact triple planetary gear systems to improve power-transmission effi-
ciency, simplify construction and reduce weight.
It also employs an optimum shift control and super wide gear ratios. They improve starting performance and
acceleration during medium and high-speed operation.
CONSTRUCTION

PCIA0002J

1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch

4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft
22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl

FUNCTION OF CLUTCH AND BRAKE

Name of the Part Abbreviation Function
Front brake (1) FR/B Fastens the front sun gear (11).
Connects the input shaft (12), the front internal gear (14) and the mid internal
Input clutch (2) I/C
gear (13).
Direct clutch (3) D/C Connects the rear carrier (15) and the rear sun gear (16).
High and low reverse clutch (4) HLR/C Connects the mid sun gear (17) and the rear sun gear (16).
Reverse brake (5) R/B Fastens the rear carrier (15).
Forward brake (6) Fwd/B Fastens the mid sun gear (17).
Low coast brake (7) LC/B Fastens the mid sun gear (17).
Allows the rear sun gear (16) to turn freely forward relative to the mid sun gear
1st one-way clutch (8) 1st/OWC
(17) but fastens it for reverse rotation.
Allows the mid sun gear (17) to turn freely in the forward direction but fastens it
Forward one-way clutch (9) Fwd/OWC
for reverse rotation.
Allows the front sun gear (11) to turn freely in the forward direction but fastens
3rd one-way clutch (10) 3rd/OWC
it for reverse rotation.

Edition: 2004 August AT-20 2005 FX

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

CLUTCH AND BAND CHART

A

AT

SCIA6226E

Edition: 2004 August AT-21 2005 FX

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

POWER TRANSMISSION
“N” Position
Since both the forward brake and the reverse brake are released, torque from the input shaft drive is not trans-
mitted to the output shaft.
“P” Position
● The same as for the “N” position, both the forward brake and the reverse brake are released, so torque
from the input shaft drive is not transmitted to the output shaft.
● The parking pawl linked with the selector lever meshes with the parking gear and fastens the output shaft
mechanically.

PCIA0003J

1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch

4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft
22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl

Edition: 2004 August AT-22 2005 FX

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

“D1 ” Position
● The forward brake and the forward one-way clutch regulate reverse rotation of the mid sun gear. A
● The 1st one-way clutch regulates reverse rotation of the rear sun gear.
● The 3rd one-way clutch regulates reverse rotation of the front sun gear.
B
● During deceleration, the mid sun gear turns forward, so the forward one-way clutch idles and the engine
brake is not activated.

AT

SCIA1512E
K
1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch
4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch L
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier M
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft
22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl

Edition: 2004 August AT-23 2005 FX

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

“M1” Position
● The front brake fastens the front sun gear.
● The forward brake and the forward one-way clutch regulate reverse rotation of the mid sun gear.
● High and low reverse clutch connects the rear sun gear and the mid sun gear.
● The low coast brake fastens the mid sun gear.
● During deceleration, the low coast brake regulates forward rotation of the mid sun gear and the engine
brake functions.

SCIA1513E

1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch

4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft
22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl

Edition: 2004 August AT-24 2005 FX

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

“D2 ” Position
● The forward brake and the forward one-way clutch regulate reverse rotation of the mid sun gear. A
● The 3rd one-way clutch regulates reverse rotation of the front sun gear.
● The direct clutch is coupled, and the rear carrier and rear sun gear are connected.
B
● During deceleration, the mid sun gear turns forward, so the forward one-way clutch idles and engine
brake is not activated.

AT

SCIA1514E
K
1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch
4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch L
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier M
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft
22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl

Edition: 2004 August AT-25 2005 FX

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

“M2” Position
● The front brake fastens the front sun gear.
● The forward brake and the forward one-way clutch regulate reverse rotation of the mid sun gear.
● The direct clutch is coupled, and the rear carrier and rear sun gear are connected.
● The low coast brake fastens the mid sun gear.
● During deceleration, the low coast brake regulates forward rotation of the mid sun gear and the engine
brake functions.

SCIA1515E

1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch

4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft
22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl

Edition: 2004 August AT-26 2005 FX

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

“D3 ” and “M3” Position

● The front brake fastens the front sun gear. A
● The direct clutch is coupled, and the rear carrier and rear sun gear are connected.
● The high and low reverse clutch is coupled, and the mid sun gear and rear sun gear are connected.
B

AT

J
SCIA1516E

1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch

4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake K
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier L
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft
22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl M

Edition: 2004 August AT-27 2005 FX

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

“D4 ” and “M4” Position

● The direct clutch is coupled, and the rear carrier and rear sun gear are connected.
● The high and low reverse clutch is coupled, and the mid sun gear and rear sun gear are connected.
● The input clutch is coupled, and the front internal gear and mid internal gear are connected.
● The drive power is conveyed to the front internal gear, mid internal gear, and rear carrier and the three
planetary gears rotate forward as one unit.

SCIA1517E

1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch

4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft
22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl

Edition: 2004 August AT-28 2005 FX

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

“D5 ” and “M5” Position

● The front brake fastens the front sun gear. A
● The input clutch is coupled, and the front internal gear and mid internal gear are connected.
● The high and low reverse clutch is coupled, and the mid sun gear and rear sun gear are connected.
B

AT

J
SCIA4984E

1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch

4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake K
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier L
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft
22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl M

Edition: 2004 August AT-29 2005 FX

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

“R” Position
● The front brake fastens the front sun gear.
● The high and low reverse clutch is coupled, and the mid sun gear and rear sun gear are connected.
● The reverse brake fastens the rear carrier.

SCIA1519E

1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch

4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft
22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl

Edition: 2004 August AT-30 2005 FX

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

TCM Function ACS002LF

A
The function of the TCM is to:
● Receive input signals sent from various switches and sensors.
● Determine required line pressure, shifting point, lock-up operation, and engine brake operation. B
● Send required output signals to the respective solenoids.
CONTROL SYSTEM OUTLINE
The automatic transmission senses vehicle operating conditions through various sensors or signals. It always AT
controls the optimum shift position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks.
SENSORS (or SIGNALS) TCM ACTUATORS
D
PNP switch Input clutch solenoid valve
Accelerator pedal position signal Shift control Direct clutch solenoid valve
Closed throttle position signal Line pressure control Front brake solenoid valve
Wide open throttle position signal Lock-up control High and low reverse clutch E
Engine speed signal Engine brake control solenoid valve
A/T fluid temperature sensor Þ Timing control Þ Low coast brake solenoid valve
Revolution sensor Fail-safe control Torque converter clutch solenoid
Vehicle speed signal Self-diagnosis valve F
Manual mode switch signal CONSULT-II communication line Line pressure solenoid valve
Stop lamp switch signal Duet-EA control A/T CHECK indicator lamp
Turbine revolution sensor CAN system Starter relay
ATF pressure switch Back-up lamp relay G

CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM

H

SCIA5325E

Edition: 2004 August AT-31 2005 FX

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

CAN Communication ACS004PB

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec-
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data [Link] details, refer to LAN-29,
"CAN Communication Unit"
Input/Output Signal of TCM ACS002LH

Line Vehicle Engine Fail-safe Self-diag-

Shift Lock-up
Control item pressure speed brake function nostics
control control
control control control (*3) function

Accelerator pedal position signal (*5) X X X X X X X

Vehicle speed sensor A/T
X X X X X X
(revolution sensor)

Vehicle speed sensor MTR(*1) (*5) X X X X X

Closed throttle position signal(*5) X (*2) X (*2) X X (*2) X (*4)

Wide open throttle position signal(*5) X (*2) X (*2) X (*2) X (*4)

Turbine revolution sensor 1 X X X X X
Turbine revolution sensor 2
X X X X X
Input (for 4th speed only)

Engine speed signals(*5) X X

PNP switch X X X X X X X (*4)

Stop lamp switch signal(*5) X X X (*4)

A/T fluid temperature sensors 1, 2 X X X X X X X

Operation signal(*5) X X X X
ASCD or
ICC Overdrive cancel
X X X
signal(*5)
TCM power supply voltage signal X X X X X X
Direct clutch solenoid (ATF pres-
X X X X
sure switch 5)
Input clutch solenoid (ATF pressure
X X X X
switch 3)
High and low reverse clutch sole-
X X X X
noid (ATF pressure switch 6)
Out- Front brake solenoid (ATF pressure
X X X X
put switch 1)
Low coast brake solenoid (ATF
X X X X X
pressure switch 2)
Line pressure solenoid X X X X X X X
TCC solenoid X X X
(*5) X
Self-diagnostics table
Starter relay X X
*1: Spare for vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor)
*2: Spare for accelerator pedal position signal
*3: If these input and output signals are different, the TCM triggers the fail-safe function.
*4: Used as a condition for starting self-diagnostics; if self-diagnostics are not started, it is judged that there is some kind of error.
*5: CAN communications

Edition: 2004 August AT-32 2005 FX

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

Line Pressure Control ACS002LI

A
● When an input torque signal equivalent to the engine drive force is sent from the ECM to the TCM, the
TCM controls the line pressure solenoid.
● This line pressure solenoid controls the pressure regulator valve as the signal pressure and adjusts the
pressure of the operating oil discharged from the oil pump to the line pressure most appropriate to the B
driving state.

AT

PCIA0007E
F
LINE PRESSURE CONTROL IS BASED ON THE TCM LINE PRESSURE CHARACTERISTIC
PATTERN
● The TCM has stored in memory a number of patterns for the optimum line pressure characteristic for the
G
driving state.
● In order to obtain the most appropriate line pressure characteristic to meet the current driving state, the
TCM controls the line pressure solenoid current valve and thus controls the line pressure.
H
Normal Control
Each clutch is adjusted to the necessary pressure to match the
engine drive force. I

PCIA0008E

L
Back-Up Control (Engine Brake)
When the select operation is performed during driving and the trans-
mission is shifted down, the line pressure is set according to the
vehicle speed. M

PCIA0009E

Edition: 2004 August AT-33 2005 FX

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

During Shift Change

The necessary and adequate line pressure for shift change is set.
For this reason, line pressure pattern setting corresponds to input
torque and gearshift selection. Also, line pressure characteristic is
set according to engine speed, during engine brake operation.

PCIA0010E

At Low Fluid Temperature

When the A/T fluid temperature drops below the prescribed tempera-
ture, in order to speed up the action of each friction element, the line
pressure is set higher than the normal line pressure characteristic.

PCIA0011E

Shift Control ACS002LJ

The clutch pressure control solenoid is controlled by the signals from the switches and sensors. Thus, the
clutch pressure is adjusted to be appropriate to the engine load state and vehicle driving state. It becomes
possible to finely control the clutch hydraulic pressure with high precision and a smoother shift change charac-
teristic is attained.

PCIA0012E

Edition: 2004 August AT-34 2005 FX

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

SHIFT CHANGE
The clutch is controlled with the optimum timing and oil pressure by the engine speed, engine torque informa- A
tion, etc.
Shift Change System Diagram
B

AT

PCIA0013E
H
*1: Full phase real-time feedback control monitors movement of gear ratio at gear change, and controls oil
pressure at real-time to achieve the best gear ratio.
I
Lock-Up Control ACS002LK

The torque converter clutch piston in the torque converter is engaged to eliminate torque converter slip to
increase power transmission efficiency. J
The torque converter clutch control valve operation is controlled by the torque converter clutch solenoid valve,
which is controlled by a signal from TCM, and the torque converter clutch control valve engages or releases
the torque converter clutch piston.
K
Lock-Up Operation Condition Table
selector lever D position M5 position M4 position
Gear position 5 4 5 4 L
Lock-up × – × ×
Slip lock-up × × – –
M
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH CONTROL VALVE CONTROL
Lock-Up Control System Diagram

PCIA0014E

Edition: 2004 August AT-35 2005 FX

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

Lock-Up Released
● In the lock-up released state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the unlocked state by the
torque converter clutch solenoid and the lock-up apply pressure is drained.
In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is not coupled.
Lock-Up Applied
● In the lock-up applied state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the locked state by the
torque converter clutch solenoid and lock-up apply pressure is generated.
In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is pressed and coupled.
SMOOTH LOCK-UP CONTROL
When shifting from the lock-up released state to the lock-up applied state, the current output to the torque con-
verter clutch solenoid is controlled with the TCM. In this way, when shifting to the lock-up applied state, the
torque converter clutch is temporarily set to the half-clutched state to reduce the shock.
Half-Clutched State
● The current output from the TCM to the torque converter clutch solenoid is varied to gradually increase
the torque converter clutch solenoid pressure.
In this way, the lock-up apply pressure gradually rises and while the torque converter clutch piston is put
into half-clutched status, the torque converter clutch piston operating pressure is increased and the cou-
pling is completed smoothly.
Slip Lock-Up Control
● In the slip region, the torque converter clutch solenoid current is controlled with the TCM to put it into the
half-clutched state. This absorbs the engine torque fluctuation and lock-up operates from low speed.
This raises the fuel efficiency for 4th and 5th gears at both low speed and when the accelerator has a low
degree of opening.
Engine Brake Control ACS002LL

● The forward one-way clutch transmits the drive force from the engine to the rear wheels. But the reverse
drive from the rear wheels is not transmitted to the engine because the one-way clutch is idling.
Therefore, the low coast brake solenoid is operated to prevent the forward one-way clutch from idling and
the engine brake is operated in the same manner as conventionally.

SCIA1520E

● The operation of the low coast brake solenoid switches the low coast brake switching valve and controls
the coupling and releasing of the low coast brake.
The low coast brake reducing valve controls the low coast brake coupling force.

Edition: 2004 August AT-36 2005 FX

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

Control Valve ACS002LM

FUNCTION OF CONTROL VALVE A

Name Function
In order to prevent the pressure supplied to the torque converter from being excessive,
Torque converter regulator valve the line pressure is adjusted to the optimum pressure (torque converter operating pres- B
sure).
Pressure regulator valve
Adjusts the oil discharged from the oil pump to the optimum pressure (line pressure) for
Pressure regulator plug AT
the driving state.
Pressure regulator sleeve
When the front brake is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure
Front brake control valve (front brake pressure) and supplies it to the front brake. (In 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 5th gears, D
adjusts the clutch pressure.)
Adjusts the pressure (accumulator control pressure) acting on the accumulator piston
Accumulator control valve
and low coast reducing valve to the pressure appropriate to the driving state.
E
Adjusts the line pressure and produces the constant pressure (pilot pressure) required
Pilot valve A
for line pressure control, shift change control, and lock-up control.
Adjusts the line pressure and produces the constant pressure (pilot pressure) required
Pilot valve B F
for shift change control.
Low coast brake switching valve During engine braking, supplies the line pressure to the low coast brake reducing valve.
When the low coast brake is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure G
Low coast brake reducing valve
(low coast brake pressure) and supplies it to the low coast brake.
N-R accumulator Produces the stabilizing pressure for when N-R is selected.
Direct clutch piston switching valve Operates in 4th gear and switches the direct clutch coupling capacity. H
When the high and low reverse clutch is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the opti-
High and low reverse clutch control valve mum pressure (high and low reverse clutch pressure) and supplies it to the high and low
reverse clutch. (In 1st, 3rd, 4th and 5th gears, adjusts the clutch pressure.) I
When the input clutch is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure
Input clutch control valve (input clutch pressure) and supplies it to the input clutch. (In 4th and 5th gears, adjusts
the clutch pressure.)
J
When the direct clutch is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure
Direct clutch control valve (direct clutch pressure) and supplies it to the direct clutch. (In 2nd, 3rd, and 4th gears,
adjusts the clutch pressure.)
K
TCC control valve
Switches the lock-up to operating or released. Also, by performing the lock-up operation
TCC control plug
transiently, lock-up smoothly.
TCC control sleeve
Operates during lock-up to switch the torque converter, cooling, and lubrication system L
Torque converter lubrication valve
oil passage.
Cool bypass valve Allows excess oil to bypass cooler circuit without being fed into it.
Line pressure relief valve Discharges excess oil from line pressure circuit. M
N-D accumulator Produces the stabilizing pressure for when N-D is selected.
Sends line pressure to each circuit according to the select position. The circuits to which
Manual valve
the line pressure is not sent drain.

Edition: 2004 August AT-37 2005 FX

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

FUNCTION OF ATF PRESSURE SWITCH

Name Function
Detects any malfunction in the front brake hydraulic pressure. When it detects any mal-
ATF pressure switch 1 (FR/B)
function, it puts the system into fail-safe mode.
Detects any malfunction in the low coast brake hydraulic pressure. When it detects any
ATF pressure switch 2 (LC/B)
malfunction, it puts the system into fail-safe mode.
Detects any malfunction in the input clutch hydraulic pressure. When it detects any mal-
ATF pressure switch 3 (I/C)
function, it puts the system into fail-safe mode.
Detects any malfunction in the direct clutch hydraulic pressure. When it detects any mal-
ATF pressure switch 5 (D/C)
function, it puts the system into fail-safe mode.
Detects any malfunction in the high and low reverse clutch hydraulic pressure. When it
ATF pressure switch 6 (HLR/C)
detects any malfunction, it puts the system into fail-safe mode.

Edition: 2004 August AT-38 2005 FX

 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM PFP:00028

A
Introduction ACS002LN

The A/T system has two self-diagnostic systems.

The first is the emission-related on board diagnostic system (OBD-II) performed by the TCM in combination B
with the ECM. The malfunction is indicated by the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) and is stored as a DTC in
the ECM memory but not the TCM memory.
The second is the TCM original self-diagnosis indicated by the A/T CHECK indicator lamp. The malfunction is
stored in the TCM memory. The detected items are overlapped with OBD-II self-diagnostic items. For detail, AT
refer to AT-94, "Display Items List" .
OBD-II Function for A/T System ACS002LO
D
The ECM provides emission-related on board diagnostic (OBD-II) functions for the A/T system. One function
is to receive a signal from the TCM used with OBD-related parts of the A/T system. The signal is sent to the
ECM when a malfunction occurs in the corresponding OBD-related part. The other function is to indicate a E
diagnostic result by means of the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) on the instrument panel. Sensors, switches
and solenoid valves are used as sensing elements.
The MIL automatically illuminates in One or Two Trip Detection Logic when a malfunction is sensed in relation
to A/T system parts. F

One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II ACS002LP

ONE TRIP DETECTION LOGIC

G
If a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, the MIL will illuminate and the malfunction will be stored in
the ECM memory as a DTC. The TCM is not provided with such a memory function.
TWO TRIP DETECTION LOGIC H
When a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, it is stored in the ECM memory as a 1st trip DTC
(diagnostic trouble code) or 1st trip freeze frame data. At this point, the MIL will not illuminate. — 1st Trip
If the same malfunction as that experienced during the first test drive is sensed during the second test drive, I
the MIL will illuminate. — 2nd Trip
The “trip” in the “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed
during vehicle operation.
J
OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ACS002LQ

HOW TO READ DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC

DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods. K
( with CONSULT-II or GST) CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0705, P0720 etc.
These DTC are prescribed by SAE J2012.
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
L
● 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
● Output of the diagnostic trouble code indicates that the indicated circuit has a malfunction. How-
ever, in case of the Mode II and GST, they do not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring
M
or occurred in the past and returned to normal.
CONSULT-II can identify them as shown below, therefore, CONSULT-II (if available) is recom-
mended.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown
on the next page. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed
in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode for “ENGINE” with CON-
SULT-II. Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven
after the last detection of a DTC.

SAT014K

Edition: 2004 August AT-39 2005 FX

 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”.

SAT015K

If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “1t”.

SAT016K

Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data

The ECM has a memory function, which stores the driving condition such as fuel system status, calculated
load value, engine coolant temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed and vehicle
speed at the moment the ECM detects a malfunction.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data,
and the data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II
or GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For
detail, refer to EC-132, "CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE)" (for VQ35DE) or EC-822, "CONSULT-II Function
(ENGINE)" (for VK45DE).
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data of freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority
for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the fol-
lowing priorities to update the data.
Priority Items
1 Freeze frame data Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306
Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175
2 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)
3 1st trip freeze frame data

Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTC) are cleared when the ECM mem-
ory is erased.
HOW TO ERASE DTC
The diagnostic trouble code can be erased by CONSULT-II, GST or ECM DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE as
described following.
● If the battery cable is disconnected, the diagnostic trouble code will be lost within 24 hours.
● When you erase the DTC, using CONSULT-II or GST is easier and quicker than switching the mode
selector on the ECM.
The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared from the ECM memory when erasing DTC
related to OBD-II. For details, refer to EC-55, "Emission-Related Diagnostic Information" (for VQ35DE) or EC-
746, "Emission-Related Diagnostic Information" (for VK45DE).
● Diagnostic trouble codes (DTC)

Edition: 2004 August AT-40 2005 FX

 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

● 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes (1st trip DTC)

● Freeze frame data A
● 1st trip freeze frame data
● System readiness test (SRT) codes
B
● Test values
HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH CONSULT-II)
● If a DTC is displayed for both ECM and TCM, it is necessary to be erased for both ECM and TCM. AT
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
2. Turn CONSULT-II ON and touch “A/T”. D
3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
4. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the TCM will be erased.) Then touch “BACK” twice.
E
5. Touch “ENGINE”.
6. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
7. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.) F

SCIA5334E

Edition: 2004 August AT-41 2005 FX

 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST)

1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
2. Perform “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”. Refer to AT-104, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOS-
TIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . (The engine warm-up step can be skipped when performing the diag-
nosis only to erase the DTC.)
3. Select Mode 4 with Generic Scan Tool (GST). For details, refer to EC-144, "Generic Scan Tool (GST)
Function" (for VQ35DE) or EC-835, "Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function" (for VK45DE).
HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS)
The A/T CHECK indicator lamp is located on the instrument panel.
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
2. Perform “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”. Refer to AT-104, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOS-
TIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . (The engine warm-up step can be skipped when performing the diag-
nosis only to erase the DTC.)
3. Perform “OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No tools)”. Refer to EC-68, "How to Erase DTC"
(for VQ35DE) or EC-758, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" (for
VK45DE).
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ACS002LR

DESCRIPTION
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON with-
out the engine running. This is a bulb check.
● If the MIL does not light up, refer to DI-42, "WARNING LAMPS" ,
or see EC-703, "MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR" (for
VQ35DE) or EC-1393, "MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR"
(for VK45DE).
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an engine system malfunction.
SEF217U

Edition: 2004 August AT-42 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PFP:00004

A
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ACS002LS

If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart. B
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to
AT-107 . AT
Priority Detected items (DTC)
1 U1000 CAN communication line
2 Except above D

Fail-Safe ACS002LT

The TCM has an electrical fail-safe mode. This mode makes it possible to operate even if there is a an error in E
a main electronic control input/output signal circuit.
In fail-safe mode, even if the selector lever is D or M mode, the transmission is fixed in 2nd, 4th or 5th
(depending on the breakdown position), so the customer should feel “slipping” or “poor acceleration”. When F
fail-safe mode is triggered, when the ignition switch is switched “ON”, the A/T CHECK indicator lamp flashes
for about 8 seconds. (Refer to AT-104, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" ).
Even when the electronic circuits are normal, under special conditions (for example, when slamming on the
brake with the wheels spinning drastically and stopping the tire rotation), the transmission can go into fail-safe G
mode. If this happens, switch OFF the ignition switch for 10 seconds, then switch it ON again to return to the
normal shift pattern. Also, the A/T CHECK indicator lamp flashes for about 8 seconds once, then is cleared.
Therefore, the customer's vehicle has returned to normal, so handle according to the “diagnostics flow” (Refer H
to AT-46 ).
FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION
If any malfunction occurs in a sensor or solenoid, this function controls the A/T to mark driving possible. I

Vehicle Speed Sensor

● Signals are input from two systems - from vehicle speed sensor A/T (revolution sensor) installed on the J
transmission and from combination meter so normal driving is possible even if there is a malfunction in
one of the systems. And if vehicle speed sensor A/T (revolution sensor) has unusual cases, 5th gear and
manual mode are prohibited.
K
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
● If there is a malfunction in one of the systems, the accelerator opening angle is controlled by ECM accord-
ing to a pre-determined accelerator angle to make driving possible. And if there are malfunctions in tow L
systems, the engine speed is fixed by ECM to a pre-determined engine speed to make driving possible.
Throttle Position Sensor
● If there is a malfunction in one of the systems, the accelerator opening angle is controlled by ECM accord- M
ing to a pre-determined accelerator angle to make driving possible. And if there are malfunctions in tow
systems, the accelerator opening angle is controlled by the idle signal sent from the ECM which is based
on input indicating either idle condition or off-idle condition (pre-determined accelerator opening) in order
to make driving possible.
PNP Switch
● In the unlikely event that a malfunction signal enters the TCM, the position indicator is switched OFF, the
starter relay is switched OFF (starter starting is disabled), the back-up lamp relay switched OFF (back-up
lamp is OFF) and the position is fixed to the D range to make driving possible.
Starter Relay
● The starter relay is switched OFF. (Starter starting is disabled.)

Edition: 2004 August AT-43 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

A/T Interlock
● If there is an A/T interlock judgment malfunction, the transmission is fixed in 2nd gear to make driving pos-
sible.
NOTE:
When the vehicle is driven fixed in 2nd gear, a turbine revolution sensor malfunction is displayed,
but this is not a turbine revolution sensor malfunction.
● When the coupling pattern below is detected, the fail-safe action corresponding to the pattern is per-
formed.
A/T INTERLOCK COUPLING PATTERN TABLE
●: NG X: OK
Clutch pressure output pattern after fail-safe func-
ATF pressure switch output
tion
Fail-safe
Gear position SW6
SW3 SW5 SW1 SW2 function
(HLR/ I/C HLR/C D/C FR/B LC/B L/U
(I/C) (D/C) (FR/B) (LC/B)
C)
Held in
3rd – X X – ● OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
2nd gear
A/T inter-
Held in
lock cou- 4th – X X – ● OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
2nd gear
pling pattern
Held in
5th X X – X ● OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
2nd gear

A/T 1st Engine Braking

● When there is an A/T first gear engine brake judgment malfunction, the low coast brake solenoid is
switched OFF to avoid the engine brake operation.
Line Pressure Solenoid
● The solenoid is switched OFF and the line pressure is set to the maximum hydraulic pressure to make
driving possible.
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid
● The solenoid is switched OFF to release the lock-up.
Low Coast Brake Solenoid
● When a (electrical or functional) malfunction occurs, in order to make driving possible, if the solenoid is
ON, the transmission is held in 2nd gear; if the solenoid is OFF, the transmission is held in 4th gear.
(Engine brake is not applied in 1st and 2nd gear.)
Input Clutch Solenoid
● If a (electrical or functional) malfunction occurs with the solenoid either ON or OFF, the transmission is
held in 4th gear to make driving possible.
Direct Clutch Solenoid
● If a (electrical or functional) malfunction occurs with the solenoid either ON or OFF, the transmission is
held in 4th gear to make driving possible.
Front Brake Solenoid
● If a (electrical or functional) malfunction occurs with the solenoid ON, in order to make driving possible,
the A/T is held in 5th gear; if the solenoid is OFF, 4th gear.
High and Low Reverse Clutch Solenoid
● If a (electrical or functional) malfunction occurs with the solenoid either ON or OFF, the transmission is
held in 4th gear to make driving possible.
Turbine Revolution Sensor 1 or 2
● The control is the same as if there were no turbine revolution sensors, 5th gear and manual mode are pro-
hibited.

Edition: 2004 August AT-44 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

How To Perform Trouble Diagnosis For Quick and Accurate Repair ACS002LU

INTRODUCTION A
The TCM receives a signal from the vehicle speed sensor, accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position
sensor) or PNP switch and provides shift control or lock-up control via A/T solenoid valves.
The TCM also communicates with the ECM by means of a signal B
sent from sensing elements used with the OBD-related parts of the
A/T system for malfunction-diagnostic purposes. The TCM is capa-
ble of diagnosing malfunctioning parts while the ECM can store mal-
AT
functions in its memory.
Input and output signals must always be correct and stable in the
operation of the A/T system. The A/T system must be in good oper-
ating condition and be free of valve seizure, solenoid valve malfunc- D
tion, etc.

SAT631IB E

It is much more difficult to diagnose a error that occurs intermittently

rather than continuously. Most intermittent errors are caused by poor F
electric connections or improper wiring. In this case, careful check-
ing of suspected circuits may help prevent the replacement of good
parts.
G
A visual check only may not find the cause of the errors. A road test
with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should be
performed. Follow the AT-46, "WORK FLOW" .
H

SAT632I

I
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a
customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The cus-
tomer can supply good information about such errors, especially J
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under
what conditions they occur. A “DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET” as
shown on the example (Refer to AT-47 ) should be used.
K
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” errors first. This will
help troubleshoot driveability errors on an electronically controlled
engine vehicle.
Also check related Service bulletins. L
SEF234G

Edition: 2004 August AT-45 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

WORK FLOW
A good understanding of the malfunction conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about a malfunction. It is important to fully understand the symp-
toms or conditions for a customer complaint.
Make good use of the two sheets provided, “Information From Customer” (Refer to AT-47 ) and “DIAGNOSTIC
WORKSHEET” (Refer to AT-47 ), to perform the best troubleshooting possible.
Work Flow Chart

SCIA4968E

*1. AT-47 *2. AT-47 *3. AT-43

*4. AT-52 *5. AT-52, AT-54 *6. AT-56
*7. AT-91 *8. AT-39 *9. AT-104
*10. AT-107 *11. AT-189 *12. AT-191
*13. AT-232 *14. AT-65 *15. AT-40
EC-55 (for VQ35DE) or EC-746 (for
*16. AT-107 *17. AT-182 *18.
VK45DE)

Edition: 2004 August AT-46 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
Information From Customer A
KEY POINTS
● WHAT..... Vehicle and A/T model
B
● WHEN..... Date, Frequencies
● WHERE..... Road conditions
● HOW..... Operating conditions, Symptoms AT
Customer name MR/MS Model and Year VIN
Trans. Model Engine Mileage
D
Malfunction Date Manuf. Date In Service Date
Frequency ❏ Continuous ❏ Intermittent ( times a day)
Symptoms ❏ Vehicle does not move. (❏ Any position ❏ Particular position) E
❏ No up-shift (❏ 1st → 2nd ❏ 2nd → 3rd ❏ 3rd → 4th ❏ 4th → 5th)
❏ No down-shift (❏ 5th → 4th ❏ 4th → 3rd ❏ 3rd → 2nd ❏ 2nd → 1st)
❏ Lock-up malfunction F
❏ Shift point too high or too low.
❏ Shift shock or slip (❏ N → D ❏ Lock-up ❏ Any drive position)
G
❏ Noise or vibration
❏ No kick down
❏ No pattern select H
❏ Others
( )
A/T CHECK indicator lamp Blinks for about 8 seconds. I
❏ Continuously lit ❏ Not lit
Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) ❏ Continuously lit ❏ Not lit J
Diagnostic Worksheet Chart
1 ❏ Read the item on cautions concerning fail-safe and understand the customer's complaint. AT-43
K
❏ A/T fluid inspection

2 ❏ Leak (Repair leak location.) AT-52

❏ State
❏ Amount
L

❏ Stall test and line pressure test

❏ Stall test
M
❏ Torque converter one-way clutch ❏ 1st one-way clutch
❏ Front brake ❏ 3rd one-way clutch AT-52, AT-
3 ❏ High and low reverse clutch ❏ Engine 54
❏ Low coast brake ❏ Line pressure low
❏ Forward brake ❏ Except for input clutch and direct
❏ Reverse brake clutch, clutches and brakes OK
❏ Forward one-way clutch
❏ Line pressure inspection - Suspected part:

Edition: 2004 August AT-47 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

❏ Perform all road tests and enter checks in required inspection items. AT-56
Check before engine is started
❏ The A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp does come on. AT-194 . AT-56
❏ Perform self-diagnostics. Enter checks for detected items. AT-94 ,AT-104
❏ AT-107, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
❏ AT-110, "DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT" .
❏ AT-114, "DTC P0700 TCM"
❏ AT-115, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" .
❏ AT-119, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" .
❏ AT-124, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" .
❏ AT-126, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-128, "DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)" .
❏ AT-130, "DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-132, "DTC P1702 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (RAM)" .
❏ AT-133, "DTC P1703 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (ROM)" .
❏ AT-134, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" .
❏ AT-137, "DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT" .
❏ AT-142, "DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR" .
4-1. ❏ AT-144, "DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" .
❏ AT-146, "DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK" .
❏ AT-149, "DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING" .
❏ AT-151, "DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-153, "DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION" .
❏ AT-155, "DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-157, "DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION" .
❏ AT-159, "DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-161, "DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION" .
❏ AT-163, "DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" .
4
❏ AT-165, "DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
FUNCTION" .
❏ AT-167, "DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-169, "DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION" .
❏ AT-171, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" .
❏ AT-176, "DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1" .
❏ AT-178, "DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3" .
❏ AT-180, "DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5" .
❏ AT-182, "DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6" .
Check at Idle
❏ AT-195, "Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position" .
❏ AT-196, "In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed"
4-2. ❏ AT-197, "In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves" . AT-57
❏ AT-198, "Large Shock (“N” to “D” Position)" .
❏ AT-201, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position" .
❏ AT-204, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position" .
Cruise Test
Part 1
❏ AT-206, "Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" .
❏ AT-209, "A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2" .
4-3. ❏ AT-211, "A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3" .
AT-58
❏ AT-213, "A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4" .
❏ AT-216, "A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D5" .
❏ AT-218, "A/T Does Not Perform Lock-Up"
❏ AT-220, "A/T Does Not Hold Lock-Up Condition" .
❏ AT-222, "Lock-Up Is Not Released" .
❏ AT-222, "Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle" .

Edition: 2004 August AT-48 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Part 2
A
❏ AT-206, "Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" .
❏ AT-209, "A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2" . AT-60
❏ AT-211, "A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3" .
❏ AT-213, "A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4" . B
Part 3
❏ AT-224, "Cannot Be Changed to Manual Mode" .
❏ AT-224, "A/T Does Not Shift: 5th Gear → 4th Gear" . AT
❏ AT-226, "A/T Does Not Shift: 4th Gear → 3rd Gear" . AT-61
❏ AT-228, "A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd Gear → 2nd Gear" .
❏ AT-230, "A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd Gear → 1st Gear" .
❏ AT-232, "Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake" . D
❏ Perform self-diagnostics. Enter checks for detected items. AT-94 ,AT-104
❏ AT-107, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
❏ AT-110, "DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT" . E
❏ AT-114, "DTC P0700 TCM"
❏ AT-115, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" .
❏ AT-119, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" .
❏ AT-124, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" . F
❏ AT-126, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-128, "DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)" .
❏ AT-130, "DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" .
4 4-3 G
❏ AT-132, "DTC P1702 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (RAM)" .
❏ AT-133, "DTC P1703 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (ROM)" .
❏ AT-134, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" .
❏ AT-137, "DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT" .
H
❏ AT-142, "DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR" .
❏ AT-144, "DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" .
❏ AT-146, "DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK" .
❏ AT-149, "DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING" . I
❏ AT-151, "DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-153, "DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION" .
❏ AT-155, "DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-157, "DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION" . J
❏ AT-159, "DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-161, "DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION" .
❏ AT-163, "DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-165, "DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE K
FUNCTION" .
❏ AT-167, "DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-169, "DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION" .
❏ AT-171, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" . L
❏ AT-176, "DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1" .
❏ AT-178, "DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3" .
❏ AT-180, "DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5" .
M
❏ AT-182, "DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6" .
❏ Inspect each system for items found to be NG in the self-diagnostics and repair or replace the malfunctioning
5
parts.
6 ❏ Perform all road tests and enter the checks again for the required items. AT-56
❏ For any remaining NG items, perform the “diagnostics procedure” and repair or replace the malfunctioning
7 parts. See the chart for diagnostics by symptoms. (This chart also contains other symptoms and inspection pro- AT-65
cedures.)
AT-41, AT-
8 ❏ Erase the results of the self-diagnostics from the TCM. 104

Edition: 2004 August AT-49 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

A/T Electrical Parts Location ACS002LV

SCIA5487E

Edition: 2004 August AT-50 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Circuit Diagram ACS002LW

AT

TCWM0245E

Edition: 2004 August AT-51 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis ACS002LY

A/T FLUID CHECK

Fluid Leakage and Fluid Level Check
● Check for fluid leakage and check the fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
Fluid Condition Check
Inspect the fluid condition.
Fluid condition Conceivable Cause Required Operation
Replace the A/T fluid and check the
Varnished (viscous Clutch, brake A/T main unit and the vehicle for
varnish state) scorched malfunctions (wire harnesses,
cooler pipes, etc.)
Milky white or Replace the A/T fluid and check for
Water in the fluid
cloudy places where water is getting in.
Large amount of Unusual wear of
Replace the A/T fluid and check for
metal powder mixed sliding parts within
improper operation of the A/T.
in A/T SAT638A

STALL TEST
Stall Test Procedure
1. Inspect the amount of engine oil. Replenish the engine oil if necessary.
2. Drive for about 10 minutes to warm up the vehicle so that the A/
T fluid temperature is 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F). Check the
amount of A/T fluid. Replenish if necessary.

SAT647B

3. Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn.

SCIA1224E

4. Start engine, apply foot brake, and place selector lever in D

position.

SCIA6291E

Edition: 2004 August AT-52 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

5. While holding down the foot brake, gradually press down the
accelerator pedal. A
6. Quickly read off the stall speed, then quickly remove your foot
from the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION: B
Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 sec-
onds during this test.
AT

SAT514G

D
7. Move the selector lever to the N position.
8. Cool down the A/T fluid.
CAUTION: E
Run the engine at idle for at least one minute.
Stall speed:
F
VQ35DE engine: 2,300 - 2,600 rpm
VK45DE engine: 1,950 - 2,250 rpm
G
SCIA6424E

Judgement of Stall Test

H
Selector lever position
Expected problem location
D and M R
● Forward brake I
● Forward one-way clutch
H O
● 1st one-way clutch
Stall speed ● 3rd one-way clutch J
O H ● Reverse brake
L L ● Engine and torque converter one-way clutch
K
H H ● Line pressure low
O: Stall speed within standard value position
H: Stall speed higher than standard value
L: Stall speed lower than standard value
L

Edition: 2004 August AT-53 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Stall test standard value position

Does not shift-up D or M position 1 → 2 Slipping in 2nd, 3rd or 4th gear Direct clutch slippage
Does not shift-up D or M position 2 → 3 Slipping in 3rd, 4th or 5th gear High and low reverse clutch slippage
Does not shift-up D or M position 3 → 4 Slipping in 4th or 5th gear Input clutch slippage
Does not shift-up D or M position 4 → 5 Slipping in 5th gear Front brake slippage

LINE PRESSURE TEST

Line Pressure Test Port

SCIA2187E

Line Pressure Test Procedure

1. Inspect the amount of engine oil and replenish if necessary.
2. Drive the car for about 10 minutes to warm it up so that the A/T fluid reaches in range of 50 to 80°C (122
to 176°F), then inspect the amount of A/T fluid and replenish if necessary.
NOTE:
The A/T fluid temperature rises in range of 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F) during 10 minutes of driving.
3. Remove the front propeller shaft from vehicle (with AWD models). Refer to PR-5, "Removal and Installa-
tion" .
4. After warming up remove the oil pressure detection plug and
install the oil pressure gauge [ST2505S001(J-34301-C)].
CAUTION:
When using the oil pressure gauge, be sure to use the O-
ring attached to the oil pressure detection plug.

SCIA5309E

5. Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn.

SCIA1224E

Edition: 2004 August AT-54 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

6. Start the engine, then measure the line pressure at both idle and
the stall speed. A
CAUTION:
● Keep the brake pedal pressed all the way down during
measurement. B
● When measuring the line pressure at the stall speed,
refer to AT-52, "STALL TEST" .
7. After the measurements are complete, install the oil pressure AT
detection plug and tighten to the specified torque.
:7.3 N·m (0.74 kg-m, 65 in-lb) SAT493G

D
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse the O-ring.

● Apply ATF to the O-ring.

E
Line Pressure
Line pressure [kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)]
Engine speed F
R position D and M positions
At idle speed 425 - 465 (4.3 - 4.8, 62 - 67) 379 - 428 (3.9 - 4.4, 55 - 62)
At stall speed 1,605 - 1,950 (16.4 - 19.9, 233 - 283) 1,310 - 1,500 (13.3 - 15.3, 190 - 218) G
Judgement of Line Pressure Test
Judgement Possible cause
H
Possible causes include malfunctions in the pressure supply system and low oil pump output.
For example

Low for all positions ● Oil pump wear

I
(P, R, N, D, M) ● Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking or spring fatigue
● Oil strainer Þ oil pump Þ pressure regulator valve passage oil leak
● Engine idle speed too low J
Only low for a spe- Possible causes include an oil pressure leak in a passage or device related to the position after
Idle speed cific position the pressure is distributed by the manual valve.
Possible causes include a sensor malfunction or malfunction in the line pressure adjustment func- K
tion.
For example

High ● Accelerator pedal position signal malfunction

L
● ATF temperature sensor malfunction
● Line pressure solenoid malfunction (sticking in OFF state, filter clog, cut line)
● Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking
M

Edition: 2004 August AT-55 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Judgement Possible cause

Possible causes include a sensor malfunction or malfunction in the pressure adjustment function.
For example
Oil pressure does ● Accelerator pedal position signal malfunction
not rise higher than ● TCM breakdown
the oil pressure for
idle. ● Line pressure solenoid malfunction (shorting, sticking in ON state)
● Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking
● Pilot valve sticking or pilot filter clogged

Stall speed Possible causes include malfunctions in the pressure supply system and malfunction in the pres-
sure adjustment function.
The pressure rises, For example
but does not enter ● Accelerator pedal position signal malfunction
the standard posi-
● Line pressure solenoid malfunction (sticking, filter clog)
tion.
● Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking
● Pilot valve sticking or pilot filter clogged
Only low for a spe- Possible causes include an oil pressure leak in a passage or device related to the position after
cific position the pressure is distributed by the manual valve.

ROAD TEST
Description
● The road test checks overall performance of the A/T and analyzes possible malfunction causes.
● The road test is carried out in the following three stages.
1. Check before engine is started. Refer to AT-56 .
2. Check at idle. Refer to AT-57 .
3. Cruise test
● Inspect all the items from Part 1 to Part 3. Refer to AT-58 , AT-60 , AT-61 .

● Before beginning the road test, check the test procedure and inspection items.
● Test all inspection items until the symptom is uncovered. Diagnose NG items when all road tests are com-
plete.
Check Before Engine is Started ACS002LZ

1. CHECK A/T CHECK INDICATOR LAMP

1. Park vehicle on level surface.
2. Move selector lever to “P” position.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
Does A/T CHECK indicator lamp light up for about 2 seconds?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Stop the road test and go to AT-194, "A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On" .

2. CHECK A/T CHECK INDICATOR LAMP

Does A/T CHECK indicator lamp flash for about 8 seconds?

YES >> For TCM fail-safe mode, perform self-diagnostics and record all NG items on the AT-47, "DIAG-
NOSTIC WORKSHEET" . Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-104, "Diag-
nostic Procedure without CONSULT-II" .
NO >> 1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Perform self-diagnostics and record all NG items on the AT-47, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET"
. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-104, "Diagnostic Procedure with-
out CONSULT-II" .
3. Go to AT-57, "Check at Idle" .

Edition: 2004 August AT-56 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Check at Idle ACS002M0

1. CHECK STARTING THE ENGINE A

1. Park vehicle on level surface.

2. Move selector lever to “P” or “N” position. B
3. Turn ignition switch OFF.
4. Start engine.
AT
Does the engine start?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Stop the road test and go to AT-195, "Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position" .
D
2. CHECK STARTING THE ENGINE
1. Turn ignition switch to ON. E
2. Move selector lever in “D”, “M” or “R” position.
3. Start engine.
Does the engine start in each position? F
YES >> Stop the road test and go to AT-195, "Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position" .
NO >> GO TO 3.
G
3. CHECK “P” POSITION FUNCTIONS
1. Move selector lever to “P” position.
H
2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Disengage the parking brake.
4. Push the vehicle forward or backward. I
5. Engage the parking brake.
When you push the vehicle with disengaging the parking brake, does it move?
YES >> Enter a check mark at “In “P” Position Vehicle Moves When Pushed” on the AT-47, "DIAGNOSTIC J
WORKSHEET" , then continue the road test.
NO >> GO TO 4.

4. CHECK “N” POSITION FUNCTIONS K

1. Start engine.
2. Move selector lever to “N” position. L
3. Disengage the parking brake.
Does vehicle move forward or backward?
M
YES >> Enter a check mark at “In “N” Position Vehicle Moves” on the AT-47, "DIAGNOSTIC WORK-
SHEET" , then continue the road test.
NO >> GO TO 5.

5. CHECK SHIFT SHOCK

1. Engage the brake.

2. Move selector lever to “D” position.
When the transmission is shifted from “N” to “D”, is there an excessive shock?
YES >> Enter a check mark at “Large Shock (“N” to “D” Position)” on the AT-47, "DIAGNOSTIC WORK-
SHEET" , then continue the road test.
NO >> GO TO 6.

Edition: 2004 August AT-57 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

6. CHECK “R” POSITION FUNCTIONS

1. Engage the brake.

2. Move selector lever to “R” position.
3. Disengage the brake for 4 to 5 seconds.
Does the vehicle creep backward?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position” on the AT-47, "DIAG-
NOSTIC WORKSHEET" , then continue the road test.

7. CHECK “D” POSITION FUNCTIONS

Inspect whether the vehicle creep forward when the transmission is put into the “D” position.
Does the vehicle creep forward in the “D” positions?
YES >> Go to AT-58, "Cruise Test - Part 1" , AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 2" , and AT-61, "Cruise Test - Part
3" .
NO >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position” on the AT-47, "DIAG-
NOSTIC WORKSHEET" , then continue the road test.
Cruise Test - Part 1 ACS002M1

1. CHECK STARTING OUT FROM D1

1. Drive the vehicle for about 10 minutes to warm up the engine oil and A/T fluid.
Appropriate temperature for the A/T fluid: 50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F)
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface.
3. Move selector lever to “P” position.
4. Start the engine.
5. Move selector lever to “D” position.
6. Press the accelerator pedal about half way down to accelerate the vehicle.
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear positions. Refer to AT-97, "DATA MONITOR MODE" .
Starts from D1?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1” on the AT-47, "DIAGNOSTIC WORK-
SHEET" , then continue the road test.

2. CHECK SHIFT-UP D1 → D2

Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D1 → D2) at the appropri-
ate speed.
● Refer to AT-63, "Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs" .
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed. Refer to AT-97, "DATA MONITOR
MODE" .
Does the A/T shift-up D1 → D2 at the correct speed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Enter a check mark at “A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2” on the AT-47, "DIAGNOSTIC WORK-
SHEET" , then continue the road test.

Edition: 2004 August AT-58 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

3. CHECK SHIFT-UP D2 → D3
A
Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D2 → D3) at the appropri-
ate speed.
● Refer to AT-63, "Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs" . B
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed. Refer to AT-97, "DATA MONITOR
MODE" . AT
Does the A/T shift-up D2 → D3 at the correct speed?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Enter a check mark at “A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3” on the AT-47, "DIAGNOSTIC WORK- D
SHEET" , then continue the road test.

4. CHECK SHIFT-UP D3 → D4 E

Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D3 → D4) at the appropri-
ate speed.
F
● Refer to AT-63, "Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs" .
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed. Refer to AT-97, "DATA MONITOR G
MODE" .
Does the A/T shift-up D3 → D4 at the correct speed?
YES >> GO TO 5. H
NO >> Enter a check mark at “A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4” on the AT-47, "DIAGNOSTIC WORK-
SHEET" , then continue the road test.

5. CHECK SHIFT-UP D4 → D5 I

Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D4 → D5) at the appropri-
ate speed. J
● Refer to AT-63, "Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs" .
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed. Refer to AT-97, "DATA MONITOR K
MODE" .
Does the A/T shift-up D4 → D5 at the correct speed?
YES >> GO TO 6. L
NO >> Enter a check mark at “A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D5” on the AT-47, "DIAGNOSTIC WORK-
SHEET" , then continue the road test.
M
6. CHECK LOCK-UP

When releasing accelerator pedal from D5, check lock-up from D5 to L/U.
● Refer to AT-63, "Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs" .
With CONSULT-II
Select “TCC SOLENOID” with the “MAIN SIGNAL” mode for “A/T”. Refer to AT-91, "CONSULT-II REFER-
ENCE VALUE" .
Does it lock-up?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Enter a check mark at “A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up” on the AT-47, "DIAGNOSTIC WORK-
SHEET" , then continue the road test.

Edition: 2004 August AT-59 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

7. CHECK LOCK-UP HOLD

Check hold lock-up.

With CONSULT-II
Select “TCC SOLENOID” with the “MAIN SIGNAL” mode for “A/T”. Refer to AT-91, "CONSULT-II REFER-
ENCE VALUE" .
Does it maintain lock-up status?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Enter a check mark at “A/T Does Not Hold lock-up Condition” on the AT-47, "DIAGNOSTIC
WORKSHEET" , then continue the road test.

8. CHECK LOCK-UP RELEASE

Check lock-up cancellation by depressing brake pedal lightly to decelerate.

With CONSULT-II
Select “TCC SOLENOID” with the “MAIN SIGNAL” mode for A/T. Refer to AT-91, "CONSULT-II REFERENCE
VALUE" .
Does lock-up cancel?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Enter a check mark at “Lock-up Is Not Released” on the AT-47, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" ,
then continue the road test.

9. CHECK SHIFT-DOWN D5 → D4

Decelerate by pressing lightly on the brake pedal.

With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position and engine speed. Refer to AT-97, "DATA MONITOR MODE" .
When the A/T shift-down D5 → D4, does the engine speed drop smoothly back to idle?
YES >> 1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Go to AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 2" .
NO >> Enter a check mark at “Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle” on the AT-47, "DIAGNOSTIC
WORKSHEET" , then continue the road test. Go to AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 2" .
Cruise Test - Part 2 ACS002M2

1. CHECK STARTING FROM D1

1. Move selector lever into “D” position.

2. Accelerate at half throttle.
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position. Refer to AT-97, "DATA MONITOR MODE" .
Does it start from D1?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1” on the AT-47, "DIAGNOSTIC WORK-
SHEET" , then continue the road test.

Edition: 2004 August AT-60 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

2. CHECK SHIFT-UP D1 → D2
A
Press the accelerator pedal down all the way and check whether or not the transmission shifts up (D1 → D2)
at the correct speed.
● Refer to AT-63, "Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs" . B
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position, throttle position and vehicle speed. Refer to AT-97, "DATA MONITOR MODE" .
AT
Does the A/T shift-up D1 → D2 at the correct speed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Enter a check mark at “A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2” on the AT-47, "DIAGNOSTIC WORK-
SHEET" , then continue the road test. D

3. CHECK SHIFT-UP D2 → D3
E
Press the accelerator pedal down all the way and check whether or not the transmission shifts up (D2 → D3)
at the correct speed.
● Refer to AT-63, "Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs" .
F
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position, throttle position and vehicle speed. Refer to AT-97, "DATA MONITOR MODE" .
Does the A/T shift-up D2 → D3 at the correct speed? G
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Enter a check mark at “A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3” on the AT-47, "DIAGNOSTIC WORK-
SHEET" , then continue the road test. H

4. CHECK SHIFT-UP D3 → D4 AND ENGINE BRAKE

When the transmission changes speed D3 → D4, return the accelerator pedal. I
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position. Refer to AT-97, "DATA MONITOR MODE" .
Does the A/T shift-up D3 → D4 and apply the engine brake? J
YES >> 1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Go to AT-61, "Cruise Test - Part 3" .
K
NO >> Enter a check mark at “A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4” on the AT-47, "DIAGNOSTIC WORK-
SHEET" , then continue the road test. Go to AT-61, "Cruise Test - Part 3" .
Cruise Test - Part 3 ACS002M3 L
1. MANUAL MODE FUNCTION
Move to manual mode from “D” position. M
Does it switch to manual mode?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Continue road test and add check mark to “Cannot Be Changed To Manual Mode” on the AT-47,
"DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" .

2. CHECK SHIFT-DOWN
During manual mode driving, is downshift from M5 → M4 → M3 → M2 → M1 performed?
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position. Refer to AT-97, "DATA MONITOR MODE" .
Is downshifting correctly performed?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle Does Not Shift” at the corresponding position (5th → 4th, 4th →
3rd, 3rd → 2nd, 2nd → 1st) on the AT-47, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" , then continue the road
test.

Edition: 2004 August AT-61 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

3. CHECK ENGINE BRAKE

Check engine brake.
Does engine braking effectively reduce speed in M1 position?
YES >> 1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Perform self-diagnostics. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-104,
"Diagnostic Procedure without CONSULT-II" .
NO >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake” on the AT-47, "DIAGNOS-
TIC WORKSHEET" , then continue trouble diagnosis.

Edition: 2004 August AT-62 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs ACS002M4

2WD MODELS A
Engine model VQ35DE
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
Throttle position B
D1 →D2 D2 →D3 D3 →D4 D4 →D5 D5 →D4 D4 →D3 D3 →D2 D2 →D1
66 - 74 106 - 114 165 - 173 236 - 244 232 - 240 145- 153 89 - 97 41 - 49
Full throttle
(41 - 46) (66 - 71) (103 - 108) (147 - 152) (144 - 149) (90 - 95) (55 - 60) (25 - 30)
AT
52 - 60 83 - 91 127 - 135 159 - 167 104 - 112 75 - 83 34 - 42 9 - 17
Half throttle
(32 - 37) (52 - 57) (79 - 84) (99 - 104) (65 - 70) (47 - 52) (21 - 26) (6 - 11)
● At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening. D
AWD MODELS
Engine model VQ35DE
E
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
Throttle position
D1 →D2 D2 →D3 D3 →D4 D4 →D5 D5 →D4 D4 →D3 D3 →D2 D2 →D1

Full throttle
60 - 68 96 - 104 150 - 158 214 - 222 210 - 218 132 - 140 81 - 89 37 - 45 F
(37 - 42) (60 - 65) (93 - 98) (133 - 138) (130 - 135) (82 - 87) (50 - 55) (23 - 28)
47 - 55 75 - 83 115 - 123 144 - 152 95 - 103 68 - 76 31 - 39 9 - 17
Half throttle
(29 - 34) (47 - 52) (71 - 76) (89 - 94) (59 - 64) (42 - 47) (19 - 24) (6 -11) G
● At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening.

Engine model VK45DE

H
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
Throttle position
D1 →D2 D2 →D3 D3 →D4 D4 →D5 D5 →D4 D4 →D3 D3 →D2 D2 →D1
62 - 70 98 - 106 153 - 161 220 - 228 216 - 224 137 - 145 85 - 93 39 - 47 I
Full throttle
(39 - 43) (61 - 66) (95 - 100) (137 - 142) (134 - 139) (85 - 90) (53 - 58) (24 - 29)
29 - 37 59 - 67 101 - 109 161 - 169 108 - 116 66 - 74 38 - 46 22 - 30
Half throttle
(18 - 23) (37 - 42) (63 - 68) (100 - 105) (67 - 72) (41 - 46) (24 - 29) (14 - 19) J
● At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening.

Edition: 2004 August AT-63 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Vehicle Speed at Which Lock-up Occurs/Releases ACS002M5

2WD MODELS
Engine model VQ35DE
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
Throttle position
Lock-up ON Lock-up OFF
Closed throttle 65 - 73 (40 - 45) 62 - 70 (39 - 43)
Half throttle 196 - 204 (122 - 127) 153 - 161 (95 - 100)
● At closed throttle, the accelerator opening is less than 1/8 condition. (Closed throttle position signal: OFF)
● At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening.

AWD MODELS
Engine model VQ35DE
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
Throttle position
Lock-up ON Lock-up OFF
Closed throttle 59 - 67 (37 - 42) 56 - 64 (35 - 40)
Half throttle 178 - 186 (111 - 116) 139 - 147 (86 - 91)
● At closed throttle, the accelerator opening is less than 1/8 condition. (Closed throttle position signal: OFF)
● At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening.

Engine model VK45DE

Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
Throttle position
Lock-up ON Lock-up OFF
Closed throttle 66 - 74 (41 - 46) 53 - 61 (33 - 38)
Half throttle 191 - 199 (119 - 124) 136 - 144 (85 - 89)
● At closed throttle, the accelerator opening is less than 1/8 condition. (Closed throttle position signal: OFF)
● At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening.

Edition: 2004 August AT-64 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Chart ACS0080Q

A
● The diagnostics item numbers show the sequence for inspection. Check in order from Item 1.
● Overhaul and check inside the A/T only if A/T fluid condition is NG. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
B
Reference
No. Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item
page
EC-83 (for AT
VQ35DE)
1. Engine idle speed or EC-774
(for
VK45DE) D
2. Engine speed signal AT-124
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-134
E
4. Control linkage adjustment AT-236
Large shock. (“N” → ON vehicle
5. ATF temperature sensor AT-137
“D” position)
1 Refer to AT-198, AT-176, F
6. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve
"Large Shock (“N” to AT-155
“D” Position)" .
7. CAN communication line AT-107
8. Fluid level and state AT-52 G
9. Line pressure test AT-54
10. Control valve with TCM AT-244
Shift H
11. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible
Shock
to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-18,
OFF vehicle AT-291
"Cross-Sectional View (2WD Models)" or AT-19, "Cross-
Sectional View (AWD Models)" ) I
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-134
2. Control linkage adjustment AT-236
J
AT-180,
3. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve
AT-159
4. CAN communication line AT-107
Shock is too large
K
ON vehicle 5. Engine speed signal AT-124
2 when changing D1 →
D2 or M1 → M2 . 6. Turbine revolution sensor AT-142

7. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR

AT-119, L
AT-144
8. Fluid level and state AT-52
9. Control valve with TCM AT-244 M
OFF vehicle 10. Direct clutch AT-327

Edition: 2004 August AT-65 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Reference
No. Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item
page
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-134
2. Control linkage adjustment AT-236
3. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch sole- AT-182,
noid valve AT-163
4. CAN communication line AT-107
Shock is too large ON vehicle 5. Engine speed signal AT-124
3 when changing D2 →
D3 or M2 → M3 . 6. Turbine revolution sensor AT-142
AT-119,
7. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-144
8. Fluid level and state AT-52
9. Control valve with TCM AT-244
OFF vehicle 10. High and low reverse clutch AT-324
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-134
2. Control linkage adjustment AT-236
AT-178,
3. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve
AT-151
4. CAN communication line AT-107
Shock is too large ON vehicle 5. Engine speed signal AT-124
4 Shift when changing D3 →
D4 or M3 → M4 . 6. Turbine revolution sensor AT-142
Shock
AT-119,
7. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-144
8. Fluid level and state AT-52
9. Control valve with TCM AT-244
OFF vehicle 10. Input clutch AT-314
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-134
2. Control linkage adjustment AT-236
AT-176,
3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve
AT-155
4. CAN communication line AT-107
ON vehicle 5. Engine speed signal AT-124
Shock is too large
5 when changing D4 → 6. Turbine revolution sensor AT-142
D5 or M4 → M5 .
AT-119,
7. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-144
8. Fluid level and state AT-52
9. Control valve with TCM AT-244
10. Front brake (brake band) AT-279
OFF vehicle
11. Input clutch AT-314

Edition: 2004 August AT-66 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Reference
No. Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item
page A
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-134
2. Control linkage adjustment AT-236
B
3. CAN communication line AT-107
4. Engine speed signal AT-124
ON vehicle 5. Turbine revolution sensor AT-142 AT
Shock is too large for AT-119,
downshift when accel- 6. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
6 AT-144
erator pedal is
pressed. 7. Fluid level and state AT-52 D
8. Control valve with TCM AT-244
9. Front brake (brake band) AT-279
E
10. Input clutch AT-314
OFF vehicle
11. High and low reverse clutch AT-324
12. Direct clutch AT-327 F
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-134
2. Control linkage adjustment AT-236
3. Engine speed signal AT-124
G

4. CAN communication line AT-107

ON vehicle 5. Turbine revolution sensor AT-142
Shift
H
Shock Shock is too large for AT-119,
6. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
7 upshift when acceler- AT-144
ator pedal is released. 7. Fluid level and state AT-52 I
8. Control valve with TCM AT-244
9. Front brake (brake band) AT-279
J
10. Input clutch AT-314
OFF vehicle
11. High and low reverse clutch AT-324
12. Direct clutch AT-327 K
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-134
2. Control linkage adjustment AT-236
3. Engine speed signal AT-124 L
4. CAN communication line AT-107
5. Turbine revolution sensor AT-142
Shock is too large for ON vehicle M
8 AT-119,
lock-up. 6. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-144
7. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-126
8. Fluid level and state AT-52
9. Control valve with TCM AT-244
OFF vehicle 10. Torque converter AT-291

Edition: 2004 August AT-67 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Reference
No. Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item
page
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-134
2. Control linkage adjustment AT-236
ON vehicle 3. CAN communication line AT-107
4. Fluid level and state AT-52
Shift Shock is too large
9 5. Control valve with TCM AT-244
Shock during engine brake.
6. Front brake (brake band) AT-279
7. Input clutch AT-314
OFF vehicle
8. High and low reverse clutch AT-324
9. Direct clutch AT-327
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
AT-119,
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-144
Gear does not change
from D1 → D2 or from AT-180,
3. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve
M1 → M2 . ON vehicle AT-159
10
Refer to AT-209, "A/T
4. Line pressure test AT-54
Does Not Shift: D1 →
D2" . 5. CAN communication line AT-107
6. Control valve with TCM AT-244
OFF vehicle 7. Direct clutch AT-327
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
AT-119,
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-144
Gear does not change
from D2 → D3 or from 3. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch sole- AT-182,
11 M2 → M3 . ON vehicle noid valve AT-163
No Up Refer to AT-211, "A/T
4. Line pressure test AT-54
Shift Does Not Shift: D2 →
D3" . 5. CAN communication line AT-107
6. Control valve with TCM AT-244
OFF vehicle 7. High and low reverse clutch AT-324
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
AT-119,
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-144

Gear does not change AT-178,

3. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve
from D3 → D4 or from AT-151
M3 → M4 . ON vehicle
12 AT-176,
Refer to AT-213, "A/T 4. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve
AT-155
Does Not Shift: D3 →
D4" . 5. Line pressure test AT-54
6. CAN communication line AT-107
7. Control valve with TCM AT-244
OFF vehicle 8. Input clutch AT-314

Edition: 2004 August AT-68 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Reference
No. Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item
page A
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
AT-119,
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR B
AT-144
AT-176,
3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve
AT-155
Gear does not change AT
from D4 → D5 or from ON vehicle 4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve
AT-180,
No Up M4 → M5 . AT-159
13
Shift Refer to AT-216, "A/T 5. Turbine revolution sensor AT-142
Does Not Shift: D4 → D
D5 " . 6. Line pressure test AT-54
7. CAN communication line AT-107
8. Control valve with TCM AT-244 E
9. Front brake (brake band) AT-291
OFF vehicle
10. Input clutch AT-314
1. Fluid level and state AT-52 F
AT-119,
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-144
G
AT-176,
3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve
In “D” or “M” range, AT-155
does not downshift to ON vehicle
AT-180,
4th gear. 4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve H
14 AT-159
Refer to AT-224, "A/T
Does Not Shift: 5th 5. CAN communication line AT-107
Gear → 4th Gear" .
6. Line pressure test AT-54
I
7. Control valve with TCM AT-244
8. Front brake (brake band) AT-291
No Down OFF vehicle
9. Input clutch AT-314 J
Shift
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
AT-119,
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR K
AT-144

In “D” or “M” range, AT-178,

3. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve
does not downshift to AT-151
3rd gear. ON vehicle
AT-176,
L
15 4. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve
Refer to AT-226, "A/T AT-155
Does Not Shift: 4th
Gear → 3rd Gear" . 5. CAN communication line AT-107
M
6. Line pressure test AT-54
7. Control valve with TCM AT-244
OFF vehicle 8. Input clutch AT-314

Edition: 2004 August AT-69 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Reference
No. Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item
page
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
AT-119,
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-144
In “D” or “M” range,
does not downshift to 3. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch sole- AT-182,
2nd gear. ON vehicle noid valve AT-163
16
Refer to AT-228, "A/T
4. CAN communication line AT-107
Does Not Shift: 3rd
Gear → 2nd Gear" . 5. Line pressure test AT-54
6. Control valve with TCM AT-244

No Down OFF vehicle 7. High and low reverse clutch AT-324

Shift 1. Fluid level and state AT-52
AT-119,
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-144
In “D” or “M” range,
does not downshift to AT-180,
ON vehicle 3. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve
1st gear. AT-159
17
Refer to AT-230, "A/T
4. CAN communication line AT-107
Does Not Shift: 2nd
Gear → 1st Gear" . 5. Line pressure test AT-54
6. Control valve with TCM AT-244
OFF vehicle 7. Direct clutch AT-327
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
AT-119,
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-144

ON vehicle 3. Direct clutch solenoid valve AT-159

4. Line pressure test AT-54
5. CAN communication line AT-107
6. Control valve with TCM AT-244
7. 3rd one-way clutch AT-312
Slips/Will When “D” or “M” posi-
18 Not tion, remains in 1st 8. 1st one-way clutch AT-319
engage gear. 9. Gear system AT-279
10. Reverse brake AT-291
11. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is
OFF vehicle impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to
AT-291
AT-18, "Cross-Sectional View (2WD Models)" or AT-19,
"Cross-Sectional View (AWD Models)" )
12. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible
to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-18,
AT-291
"Cross-Sectional View (2WD Models)" or AT-19, "Cross-
Sectional View (AWD Models)" )

Edition: 2004 August AT-70 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Reference
No. Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item
page A
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
AT-119,
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR B
AT-144

ON vehicle 3. Low coast brake solenoid valve AT-167

4. Line pressure test AT-54
AT
5. CAN communication line AT-107
When “D” or “M” posi-
19 tion, remains in 2nd 6. Control valve with TCM AT-244
gear. 7. 3rd one-way clutch AT-312 D
8. Gear system AT-279
9. Direct clutch AT-327
OFF vehicle E
10. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible
to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-18,
AT-291
"Cross-Sectional View (2WD Models)" or AT-19, "Cross-
Sectional View (AWD Models)" ) F
Slips/Will 1. Fluid level and state AT-52
Not
engage AT-119,
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-144 G
ON vehicle
3. Line pressure test AT-54
4. CAN communication line AT-107
H
5. Control valve with TCM AT-244

When “D” or “M” posi- 6. 3rd one-way clutch AT-312

tion, remains in 3rd 7. Gear system AT-279 I
20
gear.
8. High and low reverse clutch AT-324
9. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is
impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to J
OFF vehicle AT-291
AT-18, "Cross-Sectional View (2WD Models)" or AT-19,
"Cross-Sectional View (AWD Models)" )
10. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible K
to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-18,
AT-291
"Cross-Sectional View (2WD Models)" or AT-19, "Cross-
Sectional View (AWD Models)" )
L

Edition: 2004 August AT-71 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Reference
No. Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item
page
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
AT-119,
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-144
AT-178,
3. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve
AT-151
AT-180,
4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve
AT-159
ON vehicle 5. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch sole- AT-182,
noid valve AT-163
When “D” or “M” posi-
21 tion, remains in 4th 6. Low coast brake solenoid valve AT-167
gear. 7. Front brake solenoid valve AT-155
8. Line pressure test AT-54
9. CAN communication line AT-107
10. Control valve with TCM AT-244

Slips/Will 11. Input clutch AT-314

Not 12. Gear system AT-279
engage OFF vehicle
13. High and low reverse clutch AT-324
14. Direct clutch AT-327
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
AT-119,
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-144
AT-176,
ON vehicle 3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve
AT-155

When “D” or “M” posi- 4. Line pressure test AT-54

22 tion, remains in 5th 5. CAN communication line AT-107
gear.
6. Control valve with TCM AT-244
7. Front brake (brake band) AT-291
8. Input clutch AT-314
OFF vehicle
9. Gear system AT-279
10. High and low reverse clutch AT-324

Edition: 2004 August AT-72 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Reference
No. Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item
page A
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-134
B
ON vehicle 3. Line pressure test AT-54
4. CAN communication line AT-107
5. Control valve with TCM AT-244 AT
6. Torque converter AT-291
7. Oil pump assembly AT-309
Vehicle cannot be D
8. 3rd one-way clutch AT-312
started from D1 .
23 Refer to AT-206, 9. 1st one-way clutch AT-319
"Vehicle Cannot Be
10. Gear system AT-279 E
Started From D1" .
11. Reverse brake AT-291
OFF vehicle
12. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is
impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to F
AT-291
AT-18, "Cross-Sectional View (2WD Models)" or AT-19,
"Cross-Sectional View (AWD Models)" )
13. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible
G
to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-18,
AT-291
"Cross-Sectional View (2WD Models)" or AT-19, "Cross-
Sectional View (AWD Models)" )
Slips/Will
Not 1. Fluid level and state AT-52 H
Engage
2. Line pressure test AT-54
3. Engine speed signal AT-124
I
Does not lock-up. ON vehicle 4. Turbine revolution sensor AT-142
Refer to AT-218, "A/T
24 5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-126
Does Not Perform
Lock-Up" . 6. CAN communication line AT-107 J
7. Control valve with TCM AT-244
8. Torque converter AT-291
OFF vehicle K
9. Oil pump assembly AT-309
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Line pressure test AT-54 L
3. Engine speed signal AT-124
Does not hold lock-up
ON vehicle 4. Turbine revolution sensor AT-142
condition.
M
25 Refer to AT-220, "A/T 5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-126
Does Not Hold Lock-
6. CAN communication line AT-107
Up Condition" .
7. Control valve with TCM AT-244
8. Torque converter AT-291
OFF vehicle
9. Oil pump assembly AT-309

Edition: 2004 August AT-73 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Reference
No. Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item
page
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Line pressure test AT-54
3. Engine speed signal AT-124
Lock-up is not
ON vehicle 4. Turbine revolution sensor AT-142
released.
26 Refer to AT-222, 5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-126
"Lock-Up Is Not
6. CAN communication line AT-107
Released" .
7. Control valve with TCM AT-244
8. Torque converter AT-291
OFF vehicle
9. Oil pump assembly AT-309
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
AT-119,
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-144
Slips/Will
Not AT-180,
ON vehicle 3. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve
engage AT-159
4. CAN communication line AT-107
5. Line pressure test AT-54
No shock at all or the
clutch slips when 6. Control valve with TCM AT-244
27 vehicle changes 7. Torque converter AT-291
speed D1 → D2 or
M1 → M2 . 8. Oil pump assembly AT-309
9. 3rd one-way clutch AT-312
10. Gear system AT-279
OFF vehicle
11. Direct clutch AT-327
12. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible
to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-18,
AT-291
"Cross-Sectional View (2WD Models)" or AT-19, "Cross-
Sectional View (AWD Models)" )

Edition: 2004 August AT-74 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Reference
No. Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item
page A
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
AT-119,
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR B
AT-144
3. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch sole- AT-182,
ON vehicle noid valve AT-163
4. CAN communication line AT-107
AT
5. Line pressure test AT-54
6. Control valve with TCM AT-244
D
No shock at all or the 7. Torque converter AT-291
clutch slips when
8. Oil pump assembly AT-309
28 vehicle changes
speed D2 → D3 or 9. 3rd one-way clutch AT-312 E
M2 → M3 .
10. Gear system AT-279
11. High and low reverse clutch AT-324
F
OFF vehicle 12. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is
impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to
AT-291
AT-18, "Cross-Sectional View (2WD Models)" or AT-19,
"Cross-Sectional View (AWD Models)" ) G
Slips/Will 13. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible
Not to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-18,
AT-291
engage "Cross-Sectional View (2WD Models)" or AT-19, "Cross- H
Sectional View (AWD Models)" )
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
AT-119, I
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-144
AT-178,
3. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve
AT-151 J
ON vehicle
AT-176,
4. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve
AT-155
No shock at all or the
5. CAN communication line AT-107 K
clutch slips when
29 vehicle changes 6. Line pressure test AT-54
speed D3 → D4 or
7. Control valve with TCM AT-244
M3 → M4 .
8. Torque converter AT-291
L

9. Oil pump assembly AT-309

10. Input clutch AT-314
OFF vehicle M
11. Gear system AT-279
12. High and low reverse clutch AT-324
13. Direct clutch AT-327

Edition: 2004 August AT-75 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Reference
No. Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item
page
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
AT-119,
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-144
AT-176,
3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve
AT-155
ON vehicle
AT-180,
4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve
AT-159
No shock at all or the
5. CAN communication line AT-107
clutch slips when
30 vehicle changes 6. Line pressure test AT-54
speed D4 → D5 or
7. Control valve with TCM AT-244
M4 → M5 .
8. Torque converter AT-291
9. Oil pump assembly AT-309
10. Front brake (brake band) AT-291
OFF vehicle
11. Input clutch AT-314
12. Gear system AT-279
Slips/Will 13. High and low reverse clutch AT-324
Not
engage 1. Fluid level and state AT-52
AT-119,
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-144
AT-176,
3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve
AT-155
ON vehicle
AT-180,
4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve
AT-159
When you press the
accelerator pedal and 5. CAN communication line AT-107
shift speed D5 → D4
31 6. Line pressure test AT-54
or M5 → M4 the
engine idles or the 7. Control valve with TCM AT-244
transmission slips.
8. Torque converter AT-291
9. Oil pump assembly AT-309
10. Input clutch AT-314
OFF vehicle
11. Gear system AT-279
12. High and low reverse clutch AT-324
13. Direct clutch AT-327

Edition: 2004 August AT-76 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Reference
No. Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item
page A
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
AT-119,
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR B
AT-144
AT-178,
3. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve
AT-151
ON vehicle
AT-176, AT
4. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve
AT-155
5. CAN communication line AT-107
D
6. Line pressure test AT-54
When pressing the 7. Control valve with TCM AT-244
accelerator pedal and
shifting speed D4 → 8. Torque converter AT-291 E
32
D3 or M4 → M3 the 9. Oil pump assembly AT-309
engine idles or the
transmission slips. 10. 3rd one-way clutch AT-312
11. Gear system AT-279 F
12. High and low reverse clutch AT-324
OFF vehicle 13. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is
G
impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to
AT-291
AT-18, "Cross-Sectional View (2WD Models)" or AT-19,
"Cross-Sectional View (AWD Models)" )
14. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible H
Slips/Will
to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-18,
Not AT-291
"Cross-Sectional View (2WD Models)" or AT-19, "Cross-
engage
Sectional View (AWD Models)" )
I
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
AT-119,
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-144 J
3. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch sole- AT-182,
noid valve AT-163
ON vehicle
AT-180, K
4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve
AT-159
5. CAN communication line AT-107
When pressing the
accelerator pedal and 6. Line pressure test AT-54 L
shifting speed D3 →
33 7. Control valve with TCM AT-244
D2 or M3 → M2 the
engine idles or the 8. Torque converter AT-291
transmission slips. M
9. Oil pump assembly AT-309
10. 3rd one-way clutch AT-312
11. Gear system AT-279
OFF vehicle
12. Direct clutch AT-327
13. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible
to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-18,
AT-291
"Cross-Sectional View (2WD Models)" or AT-19, "Cross-
Sectional View (AWD Models)" )

Edition: 2004 August AT-77 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Reference
No. Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item
page
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
AT-119,
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-144
AT-180,
ON vehicle 3. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve
AT-159
4. CAN communication line AT-107
5. Line pressure test AT-54
6. Control valve with TCM AT-244

When pressing the 7. Torque converter AT-291

accelerator pedal and 8. Oil pump assembly AT-309
shifting speed D2 →
34 9. 3rd one-way clutch AT-312
D1 or M2 → M1 the
engine idles or the 10. 1st one-way clutch AT-319
transmission slips.
11. Gear system AT-279
12. Reverse brake AT-291
OFF vehicle
13. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is
impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to
AT-291
AT-18, "Cross-Sectional View (2WD Models)" or AT-19,
"Cross-Sectional View (AWD Models)" )
14. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible
to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-18,
Slips/Will AT-291
"Cross-Sectional View (2WD Models)" or AT-19, "Cross-
Not Sectional View (AWD Models)" )
Engage
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Line pressure test AT-54
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-134
ON vehicle 4. CAN communication line AT-107
5. PNP switch AT-115
6. Control linkage adjustment AT-236
7. Control valve with TCM AT-244
8. Torque converter AT-291
With selector lever in 9. Oil pump assembly AT-309
35 “D” position, accelera-
tion is extremely poor. 10. 1st one-way clutch AT-319
11. Gear system AT-279
12. Reverse brake AT-291
OFF vehicle 13. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is
impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to
AT-291
AT-18, "Cross-Sectional View (2WD Models)" or AT-19,
"Cross-Sectional View (AWD Models)" )
14. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible
to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-18,
AT-291
"Cross-Sectional View (2WD Models)" or AT-19, "Cross-
Sectional View (AWD Models)" )

Edition: 2004 August AT-78 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Reference
No. Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item
page A
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Line pressure test AT-54
B
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-134
4. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch sole- AT-182,
ON vehicle noid valve AT-163
AT
With selector lever in 5. CAN communication line AT-107
36 “R” position, accelera-
6. PNP switch AT-115
tion is extremely poor.
7. Control linkage adjustment AT-236 D
8. Control valve with TCM AT-244
9. Gear system AT-279
E
OFF vehicle 10. Output shaft AT-291
11. Reverse brake AT-291
1. Fluid level and state AT-52 F
2. Line pressure test AT-54
Slips/Will
Not ON vehicle 3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-134
Engage 4. CAN communication line AT-107
G

5. Control valve with TCM AT-244

6. Torque converter AT-291 H
7. Oil pump assembly AT-309
While starting off by 8. 3rd one-way clutch AT-312
accelerating in 1st, I
37 9. 1st one-way clutch AT-319
engine races or slip-
page occurs. 10. Gear system AT-279
11. Reverse brake AT-291
OFF vehicle J
12. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is
impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to
AT-291
AT-18, "Cross-Sectional View (2WD Models)" or AT-19,
"Cross-Sectional View (AWD Models)" ) K
13. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible
to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-18,
AT-291
"Cross-Sectional View (2WD Models)" or AT-19, "Cross- L
Sectional View (AWD Models)" )

Edition: 2004 August AT-79 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Reference
No. Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item
page
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Line pressure test AT-54
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-134
ON vehicle 4. CAN communication line AT-107
AT-180,
5. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve
AT-159
6. Control valve with TCM AT-244
While accelerating in
38 2nd, engine races or 7. Torque converter AT-291
slippage occurs. 8. Oil pump assembly AT-309
9. 3rd one-way clutch AT-312
10. Gear system AT-279
OFF vehicle
11. Direct clutch AT-327
12. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible
to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-18,
AT-291
"Cross-Sectional View (2WD Models)" or AT-19, "Cross-
Sectional View (AWD Models)" )
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
Slips/Will
Not 2. Line pressure test AT-54
Engage
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-134
ON vehicle 4. CAN communication line AT-107
5. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch sole- AT-182,
noid valve AT-163
6. Control valve with TCM AT-244
7. Torque converter AT-291
While accelerating in 8. Oil pump assembly AT-309
39 3rd, engine races or
9. 3rd one-way clutch AT-312
slippage occurs.
10. Gear system AT-279
11. High and low reverse clutch AT-324
OFF vehicle 12. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is
impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to
AT-291
AT-18, "Cross-Sectional View (2WD Models)" or AT-19,
"Cross-Sectional View (AWD Models)" )
13. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible
to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-18,
AT-291
"Cross-Sectional View (2WD Models)" or AT-19, "Cross-
Sectional View (AWD Models)" )

Edition: 2004 August AT-80 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Reference
No. Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item
page A
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Line pressure test AT-54
B
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-134
ON vehicle 4. CAN communication line AT-107
AT-178, AT
5. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve
AT-151
While accelerating in
40 4th, engine races or 6. Control valve with TCM AT-244
slippage occurs. 7. Torque converter AT-291 D
8. Oil pump assembly AT-309
9. Input clutch AT-314
OFF vehicle E
10. Gear system AT-279
11. High and low reverse clutch AT-324
12. Direct clutch AT-327 F
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Line pressure test AT-54
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-134
G
ON vehicle 4. CAN communication line AT-107
Slips/Will
Not AT-176, H
5. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve
Engage AT-155
While accelerating in
41 5th, engine races or 6. Control valve with TCM AT-244
slippage occurs. 7. Torque converter AT-291 I
8. Oil pump assembly AT-309
9. Front brake (brake band) AT-291
OFF vehicle J
10. Input clutch AT-314
11. Gear system AT-279
12. High and low reverse clutch AT-324 K
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Line pressure test AT-54
3. Engine speed signal AT-124 L
ON vehicle 4. Turbine revolution sensor AT-142
42 Slips at lock-up. 5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-126
M
6. CAN communication line AT-107
7. Control valve with TCM AT-244
8. Torque converter AT-291
OFF vehicle
9. Oil pump assembly AT-309

Edition: 2004 August AT-81 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Reference
No. Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item
page
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Line pressure test AT-54
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-134
AT-180,
4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve
ON vehicle AT-159
5. PNP switch AT-115
6. CAN communication line AT-107
7. Control linkage adjustment AT-236
No creep at all. 8. Control valve with TCM AT-244
Refer to AT-201,
"Vehicle Does Not 9. Torque converter AT-291
Creep Backward In 10. Oil pump assembly AT-309
43
“R” Position" , AT-204,
"Vehicle Does Not 11. 1st one-way clutch AT-319
Creep Forward In “D” 12. Gear system AT-279
Position"
13. Reverse brake AT-291
Slips/Will
Not 14. Direct clutch AT-327
OFF vehicle
Engage 15. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is
impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to
AT-291
AT-18, "Cross-Sectional View (2WD Models)" or AT-19,
"Cross-Sectional View (AWD Models)" )
16. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible
to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-18,
AT-291
"Cross-Sectional View (2WD Models)" or AT-19, "Cross-
Sectional View (AWD Models)" )
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Line pressure test AT-54
ON vehicle 3. PNP switch AT-115

Vehicle cannot run in 4. Control linkage adjustment AT-236

44
all positions. 5. Control valve with TCM AT-244
6. Oil pump assembly AT-309
OFF vehicle 7. Gear system AT-279
8. Output shaft AT-291

Edition: 2004 August AT-82 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Reference
No. Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item
page A
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Line pressure test AT-54
B
ON vehicle 3. PNP switch AT-115
4. Control linkage adjustment AT-236
5. Control valve with TCM AT-244 AT
6. Torque converter AT-291
7. Oil pump assembly AT-309
With selector lever in D
8. 1st one-way clutch AT-319
45 “D” position, driving is
not possible. 9. Gear system AT-279
10. Reverse brake AT-291 E
OFF vehicle 11. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is
Slips/Will impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to
AT-291
Not AT-18, "Cross-Sectional View (2WD Models)" or AT-19,
"Cross-Sectional View (AWD Models)" ) F
Engage
12. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible
to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-18,
AT-291
"Cross-Sectional View (2WD Models)" or AT-19, "Cross- G
Sectional View (AWD Models)" )
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Line pressure test AT-54 H
ON vehicle 3. PNP switch AT-115
With selector lever in 4. Control linkage adjustment AT-236
46 “R” position, driving is I
not possible. 5. Control valve with TCM AT-244
6. Gear system AT-279
OFF vehicle 7. Output shaft AT-291 J
8. Reverse brake AT-291
1. PNP switch AT-115
K
2. Fluid level and state AT-52
3. Control linkage adjustment AT-236

Does Not Does not change M5 ON vehicle 4. Manual mode switch AT-171 L
47
Change → M4. 5. ATF pressure switch 1 AT-176
6. CAN communication line AT-107
M
7. Control valve with TCM AT-244
OFF vehicle 8. Front brake (brake band) AT-291

Edition: 2004 August AT-83 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Reference
No. Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item
page
1. PNP switch AT-115
2. Fluid level and state AT-52
3. Control linkage adjustment AT-236
4. Manual mode switch AT-171
ON vehicle
Does not change M4 AT-176,
48 5. ATF pressure switch 1 and ATF pressure switch 3
→ M3. AT-178
6. CAN communication line AT-107
7. Control valve with TCM AT-244
8. Front brake (brake band) AT-291
OFF vehicle
9. Input clutch AT-314
1. PNP switch AT-115
2. Fluid level and state AT-52
3. Control linkage adjustment AT-236
ON vehicle 4. Manual mode switch AT-171

Does not change M3 5. ATF pressure switch 6 AT-182

49
→ M2. 6. CAN communication line AT-107

Does Not 7. Control valve with TCM AT-244

Change 8. Front brake (brake band) AT-291
OFF vehicle 9. Input clutch AT-314
10. High and low reverse clutch AT-324
1. PNP switch AT-115
2. Fluid level and state AT-52
3. Control linkage adjustment AT-236
ON vehicle 4. Manual mode switch AT-171

Does not change M2 5. ATF pressure switch 5 AT-180

50
→ M1. 6. CAN communication line AT-107
7. Control valve with TCM AT-244
8. Input clutch AT-314
OFF vehicle 9. High and low reverse clutch AT-324
10. Direct clutch AT-327
Cannot be changed to 1. Manual mode switch AT-171
manual mode.
51 2. Turbine revolution sensor AT-142
Refer to AT-224, ON vehicle
"Cannot Be Changed
3. CAN communication line AT-107
to Manual Mode" .
AT-119,
1. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-144
2. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-134
Shift point is high in
52 Others ON vehicle
“D” position. 3. CAN communication line AT-107
4. ATF temperature sensor AT-137
5. Control valve with TCM AT-244

Edition: 2004 August AT-84 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Reference
No. Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item
page A
AT-119,
1. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-144

53
Shift point is low in “D”
ON vehicle 2. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-134 B
position.
3. CAN communication line AT-107
4. Control valve with TCM AT-244
AT
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Engine speed signal AT-124
3. Turbine revolution sensor AT-142 D
AT-119,
4. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
ON vehicle AT-144
Judder occurs during
54 E
lock-up. 5. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-134
6. CAN communication line AT-107
7. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-126
F
8. Control valve with TCM AT-244
OFF vehicle 9. Torque converter AT-291

Others
1. Fluid level and state AT-52 G
2. Engine speed signal AT-124
ON vehicle
3. CAN communication line AT-107
H
4. Control valve with TCM AT-244
Strange noise in “R”
55 5. Torque converter AT-291
position.
6. Oil pump assembly AT-309 I
OFF vehicle 7. Gear system AT-279
8. High and low reverse clutch AT-324
J
9. Reverse brake AT-291
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Engine speed signal AT-124 K
ON vehicle
3. CAN communication line AT-107
Strange noise in “N”
56 4. Control valve with TCM AT-244
position.
5. Torque converter AT-291 L
OFF vehicle 6. Oil pump assembly AT-309
7. Gear system AT-279
M

Edition: 2004 August AT-85 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Reference
No. Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item
page
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Engine speed signal AT-124
ON vehicle
3. CAN communication line AT-107
4. Control valve with TCM AT-244

Strange noise in “D” 5. Torque converter AT-291

57
position. 6. Oil pump assembly AT-309
7. Gear system AT-279
OFF vehicle
8. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible
to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-18,
AT-291
"Cross-Sectional View (2WD Models)" or AT-19, "Cross-
Sectional View (AWD Models)" )
1. PNP switch AT-115
2. Fluid level and state AT-52
3. Control linkage adjustment AT-236
Vehicle does not
decelerate by engine ON vehicle 4. Manual mode switch AT-171
brake. 5. ATF pressure switch 5 AT-180
58 Refer to AT-232,
"Vehicle Does Not 6. CAN communication line AT-107
Decelerate By Engine 7. Control valve with TCM AT-244
Brake" .
8. Input clutch AT-314
OFF vehicle 9. High and low reverse clutch AT-324
Others
10. Direct clutch AT-327
1. PNP switch AT-115
2. Fluid level and state AT-52
3. Control linkage adjustment AT-236

Engine brake does ON vehicle 4. Manual mode switch AT-171

59
not work M5 → M4. 5. ATF pressure switch 1 AT-176
6. CAN communication line AT-107
7. Control valve with TCM AT-244
OFF vehicle 8. Front brake (brake band) AT-291
1. PNP switch AT-115
2. Fluid level and state AT-52
3. Control linkage adjustment AT-236
4. Manual mode switch AT-171
ON vehicle
Engine brake does AT-176,
60 5. ATF pressure switch 1 and ATF pressure switch 3
not work M4 → M3. AT-178
6. CAN communication line AT-107
7. Control valve with TCM AT-244
8. Front brake (brake band) AT-291
OFF vehicle
9. Input clutch AT-314

Edition: 2004 August AT-86 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Reference
No. Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item
page A
1. PNP switch AT-115
2. Fluid level and state AT-52
B
3. Control linkage adjustment AT-236
ON vehicle 4. Manual mode switch AT-171

Engine brake does 5. ATF pressure switch 6 AT-182 AT

61
not work M3 → M2. 6. CAN communication line AT-107
7. Control valve with TCM AT-244
D
8. Front brake (brake band) AT-291
OFF vehicle 9. Input clutch AT-314
10. High and low reverse clutch AT-324 E
1. PNP switch AT-115
2. Fluid level and state AT-52
3. Control linkage adjustment AT-236 F
ON vehicle 4. Manual mode switch AT-171

Engine brake does 5. ATF pressure switch 5 AT-180

62 G
not work M2 → M1. 6. CAN communication line AT-107
7. Control valve with TCM AT-244
8. Input clutch AT-314 H
OFF vehicle 9. High and low reverse clutch AT-324
Others
10. Direct clutch AT-327
I
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Line pressure test AT-54
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-134 J
ON vehicle
4. CAN communication line AT-107
5. Direct clutch solenoid valve AT-159
K
6. Control valve with TCM AT-244
7. Torque converter AT-291
8. Oil pump assembly AT-309 L
9. Input clutch AT-314
63 Maximum speed low.
10. Gear system AT-279
11. High and low reverse clutch AT-324
M
12. Direct clutch AT-327
OFF vehicle
13. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is
impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to
AT-291
AT-18, "Cross-Sectional View (2WD Models)" or AT-19,
"Cross-Sectional View (AWD Models)" )
14. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible
to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-18,
AT-291
"Cross-Sectional View (2WD Models)" or AT-19, "Cross-
Sectional View (AWD Models)" )

Edition: 2004 August AT-87 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Reference
No. Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item
page
EC-83 (for
VQ35DE)
1. Engine idle speed or EC-774
(for
Extremely large ON vehicle
64 VK45DE)
creep.
2. CAN communication line AT-107
3. ATF pressure switch 5 AT-180
OFF vehicle 4. Torque converter AT-291
With selector lever in 1. PNP switch AT-115
“P” position, vehicle ON vehicle
2. Control linkage adjustment AT-236
does not enter parking
condition or, with
selector lever in
AT-
another position, park-
65 256(2WD
ing condition is not
models) or
cancelled. OFF vehicle 3. Parking pawl components
AT-291
Refer to AT-196, "In
(AWD
“P” Position, Vehicle
models)
Moves When Pushed"
.
1. PNP switch AT-115
2. Fluid level and state AT-52
ON vehicle
3. Control linkage adjustment AT-236
4. Control valve with TCM AT-244
Others Vehicle runs with
66 transmission in “P” AT-
position. 256(2WD
models) or
5. Parking pawl components
OFF vehicle AT-291
(AWD
models)
6. Gear system AT-279
1. PNP switch AT-115
2. Fluid level and state AT-52
ON vehicle
3. Control linkage adjustment AT-236
4. Control valve with TCM AT-244
5. Input clutch AT-314
Vehicle runs with 6. Gear system AT-279
transmission in “N”
position. 7. Direct clutch AT-327
67
Refer to AT-197, "In 8. Reverse brake AT-291
“N” Position, Vehicle
Moves" . 9. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is
OFF vehicle impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to
AT-291
AT-18, "Cross-Sectional View (2WD Models)" or AT-19,
"Cross-Sectional View (AWD Models)" )
10. Low coast brake (Parts behind drum support is impossi-
ble to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-18,
AT-291
"Cross-Sectional View (2WD Models)" or AT-19, "Cross-
Sectional View (AWD Models)" )

Edition: 2004 August AT-88 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Reference
No. Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item
page A
Engine does not start PG-3, SC-
1. Ignition switch and starter
in “N” or “P” position. 10
Refer to AT-195, B
68 ON vehicle 2. Control linkage adjustment AT-236
"Engine Cannot Be
Started In “P” or “N”
3. PNP switch AT-115
Position" .
PG-3, SC-
AT
1. Ignition switch and starter
Engine starts in posi- 10
69 tions other than “N” or ON vehicle
2. Control linkage adjustment AT-236
“P”. D
3. PNP switch AT-115
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Engine speed signal AT-124 E
3. Turbine revolution sensor AT-142
ON vehicle
70 Engine stall. 4. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-126
5. CAN communication line AT-107 F
6. Control valve with TCM AT-244
OFF vehicle 7. Torque converter AT-291
G
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
Others 2. Engine speed signal AT-124
3. Turbine revolution sensor AT-142 H
Engine stalls when ON vehicle
71 selector lever shifted 4. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-126
“N” → “D”, “R”.
5. CAN communication line AT-107
I
6. Control valve with TCM AT-244
OFF vehicle 7. Torque converter AT-291
1. Fluid level and state AT-52 J
AT-180,
2. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve
AT-159
AT-176, K
3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve
AT-155
Engine speed does
ON vehicle
not return to idle. 4. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-134
72 Refer to AT-222,
AT-119,
L
"Engine Speed Does 5. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-144
Not Return To Idle" .
6. CAN communication line AT-107
M
7. Control valve with TCM AT-244
8. Front brake (brake band) AT-291
OFF vehicle
9. Direct clutch AT-327

Edition: 2004 August AT-89 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values ACS002M8

A/T ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT

SCIA1658E

TCM INSPECTION TABLE

Data are reference value and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Terminal Item Condition Data (Approx.)
color
Power supply
1 LG Always Battery voltage
(Memory back-up)
Power supply
2 LG Always Battery voltage
(Memory back-up)
3 L CAN-H – –
K-line (CONSULT-
4 PU The terminal is connected to the data link connector for CONSULT-II. –
II signal)
5 B Ground – –

– Battery voltage

6 Y Power supply

– 0V

Selector lever in “R” position. 0V

Back-up lamp
7 OR
relay Selector lever in other positions. Battery voltage

8 R CAN-L – –
Selector lever in N and “P” positions. Battery voltage
9 GY Starter relay
Selector lever in other positions. 0V

10 B Ground – –

Edition: 2004 August AT-90 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

CONSULT-II Function (A/T) ACS002M9

A
CONSUT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test models shown following.
FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode Function Reference page B
Self-diagnostic results Self-diagnostic results can be read and erased quickly. AT-94
Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECU can be read. AT-97
AT
CAN diagnostic support
The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. —
monitor
Performed by CONSULT-II instead of a technician to determine whether each system
Function test — D
is “OK” or “NG”.
DTC work support Select the operating condition to confirm Diagnosis Trouble Codes. AT-101
ECU part number ECU part number can be read. — E
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE
NOTICE:
1. The CONSULT-II electrically displays shift timing and lock-up timing (that is, operation timing of each sole- F
noid).
Check for time difference between actual shift timing and the CONSULT-II display. If the difference is
noticeable, mechanical parts (except solenoids, sensors, etc.) may be malfunctioning. Check mechanical G
parts using applicable diagnostic procedures.
2. Shift schedule (which implies gear position) displayed on CONSULT-II and that indicated in Service Man-
ual may differ slightly. This occurs because of the following reasons: H
– Actual shift schedule has more or less tolerance or allowance,
– Shift schedule indicated in Service Manual refers to the point where shifts start, and
– Gear position displayed on CONSULT-II indicates the point where shifts are completed. I
3. Display of solenoid valves on CONSULT-II changes at the start of shifting, while gear position is displayed
upon completion of shifting (which is computed by TCM).
J
Display value
Item name Condition
(Approx.)
VHCL/S SE·A/T Approximately
During driving matches the speed- K
VHCL/S SE·MTR ometer reading.
Released accelerator pedal. 0.0/8
ACCELE POSI L
Fully depressed accelerator pedal. 8/8
Released accelerator pedal. 0.0/8
THROTTLE POSI
Fully depressed accelerator pedal. 8/8
M
Released accelerator pedal. ON
CLSO THL POS
Fully depressed accelerator pedal. OFF
Fully depressed accelerator pedal. ON
W/O THL POS
Released accelerator pedal. OFF
Depressed brake pedal. ON
BRAKE SW
Released brake pedal. OFF
Closely matches the
ENGINE SPEED Engine running
tachometer reading.
Approximately
TURBINE REV During driving (lock-up ON) matches the engine
speed.
ATF TEMP SE 1 2.2 - 1.8 - 0.6 V
0°C (32° F) - 20°C (68°F) - 80°C (176°F)
ATF TEMP SE 2 2.2 - 1.7 - 0.45 V

Edition: 2004 August AT-91 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Display value
Item name Condition
(Approx.)
When performing slip lock-up 0.2 - 0.4 A
TCC SOLENOID
When performing lock-up 0.4 - 0.6 A
LINE PRES SOL During driving 0.2 - 0.6 A
Front brake engaged. Refer to AT-21 . 0.6 - 0.8 A
FR/B SOLENOID
Front brake disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . 0 - 0.05 A
Input clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . 0.6 - 0.8 A
I/C SOLENOID
Input clutch engaged. Refer to AT-21 . 0 - 0.05 A
Direct clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . 0.6 - 0.8 A
D/C SOLENOID
Direct clutch engaged. Refer to AT-21 . 0 - 0.05 A
High and low reverse clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . 0.6 - 0.8 A
HLR/C SOL
High and low reverse clutch engaged. Refer to AT-21 . 0 - 0.05 A
Selector lever in “N”, “P” position. ON
STARTER RELAY
Selector lever in other position. OFF
Selector lever in “N”,“P” position. N/P
SLCT LVR POSI Selector lever in “R” position. R
Selector lever in “D” position. D
Low coast brake engaged. Refer to AT-21 . ON
ON OFF SOL
Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . OFF
Front brake engaged. Refer to AT-21 . ON
ATF PRES SW 1
Front brake disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . OFF
Low coast brake engaged. Refer to AT-21 . ON
ATF PRES SW 2
Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . OFF
Input clutch engaged. Refer to AT-21 . ON
ATF PRES SW 3
Input clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . OFF
Direct clutch engaged. Refer to AT-21 . ON
ATF PRES SW 5
Direct clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . OFF
High and low reverse clutch engaged. Refer to AT-21 . ON
ATF PRES SW 6
High and low reverse clutch disengaged Refer to AT-21 . OFF
Manual shift gate position (neutral) ON
MANU MODE SW
Other than the above OFF
Manual shift gate position OFF
NON M-MODE SW
Other than the above ON
Selector lever: + side ON
UP SW LEVER
Other than the above OFF
Selector lever: - side ON
DOWN SW LEVER
Other than the above OFF

Edition: 2004 August AT-92 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE

CAUTION: A
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication.
● For details, refer to the separate “CONSULT-II Operations Man- B
ual”.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data AT
link connector, which is located in instrument lower driver panel.

PBIB1503E E

3. Turn ignition switch ON.

4. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. F

SAIA0450E
I

5. Touch “A/T”.
If “A/T” is not indicated, go to GI-40, "CONSULT-II Data Link J
Connector (DLC) Circuit" .

SAT014K

M
6. Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service
procedure.

SCIA5304E

Edition: 2004 August AT-93 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE

After performing AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , place check marks for results on the AT-47,
"DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" . Reference pages are provided following the items.
Operation Procedure
1. Perform “CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE”. Refer to AT-93, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE"
.
2. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
Display shows malfunction experienced since the last erasing
operation.

SCIA5304E

Display Items List

X: Applicable, —: Not applicable
TCM self- OBD-II
diagnosis (DTC)
MIL indica-
Items (CONSULT-II tor lamp*1, Reference
Malfunction is detected when... “A/T” with
screen terms) “ENGINE” page
CONSULT-
with CON-
II
SULT-II or
GST
CAN COMM CIR-
● When a malfunction is detected in CAN communications U1000 U1000 AT-107
CUIT
● If this signal is ON other than in P or N position, this is judged to be
STARTER RELAY/ a malfunction.
P0615 — AT-110
CIRC (And if it is OFF in P or N position, this too is judged to be a mal-
function.)
TCM ● TCM is malfunctioning P0700 P0700*3 AT-114
● PNP switch 1-4 signals input with impossible pattern
PNP SW/CIRC ● P position is detected from N position without any other position P0705 P0705 AT-115
being detected in between.
● Signal from vehicle speed sensor A/T (Revolution sensor) not input
VEH SPD SEN/CIR due to cut line or the like
AT (Revolution ● Unexpected signal input during running P0720 P0720 AT-119
sensor) ● After ignition switch is turned ON, unexpected signal input from
vehicle speed sensor MTR before the vehicle starts moving
ENGINE SPEED ● TCM does not receive the CAN communication signal from the
P0725 P0725*3 AT-124
SIG ECM.
TCC SOLENOID/ ● Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to cut line, short, or the
P0740 P0740 AT-126
CIRC like
● A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is good.
A/T TCC S/V
● TCM detects as irregular by comparing difference value with slip P0744 P0744*2 AT-128
FNCTN
rotation.
● Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to cut line, short, or the
L/PRESS SOL/ like
P0745 P0745 AT-130
CIRC ● TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor
value.
TCM·RAM ● TCM memory (RAM) is malfunctioning. P1702 — AT-132

Edition: 2004 August AT-94 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TCM self- OBD-II

diagnosis (DTC) A
MIL indica-
Items (CONSULT-II tor lamp*1, Reference
Malfunction is detected when... “A/T” with
screen terms) “ENGINE” page
CONSULT- B
with CON-
II
SULT-II or
GST
TCM·ROM ● TCM memory (ROM) is malfunctioning. P1703 — AT-133
AT

● TCM does not receive the proper accelerator pedal position signals
TP SEN/CIRC A/T P1705 P1705*3 AT-134
(input by CAN communication) from ECM.
D
ATF TEMP SEN/ ● During running, the ATF temperature sensor signal voltage is
P1710 P0710 AT-137
CIRC excessively high or low
● TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor.
TURBINE REV S/ E
● TCM detects an irregularity only at position of 4th gear for turbine P1716 P1716 AT-142
CIRC
revolution sensor 2.
● Signal (CAN communication) from vehicle speed sensor MTR not
VEH SPD SE/ input due to cut line or the like
F
P1721 — AT-144
CIR·MTR
● Unexpected signal input during running
● Except during shift change, the gear position and ATF pressure
A/T INTERLOCK P1730 P1730 AT-146 G
switch states are monitored and comparative judgement made.
● Each ATF pressure switch and solenoid current is monitored and if
A/T 1ST E/BRAK-
a pattern is detected having engine braking 1st gear other than in P1731 — AT-149
ING H
the M1 position, a malfunction is detected.
● Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to functional malfunc-
I/C SOLENOID/ tion, cut line, short, or the like
P1752 P1752 AT-151 I
CIRC ● TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor
value.
● TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between
gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 3 is irregular J
during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift
I/C SOLENOID change) P1754 P1754*2 AT-153
FNCTN
● TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of K
ATF pressure switch 3 is irregular during releasing accelerator
pedal. (Other than during shift change)
● Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to functional malfunc- L
FR/B SOLENOID/ tion, cut line, short, or the like
P1757 P1757 AT-155
CIRC ● TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor
value.
M
● TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between
gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 1 is irregular
during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift
FR/B SOLENOID change) P1759 P1759*2 AT-157
FNCT
● TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of
ATF pressure switch 1 is irregular during releasing accelerator
pedal. (Other than during shift change)
● Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to cut line, short, or the
D/C SOLENOID/ like
P1762 P1762 AT-159
CIRC ● TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor
value.

Edition: 2004 August AT-95 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TCM self- OBD-II

diagnosis (DTC)
MIL indica-
Items (CONSULT-II tor lamp*1, Reference
Malfunction is detected when... “A/T” with
screen terms) “ENGINE” page
CONSULT-
with CON-
II
SULT-II or
GST
● TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between
gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 5 is irregular
during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift
D/C SOLENOID change) P1764 P1764*2 AT-161
FNCTN
● TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of
ATF pressure switch 5 is irregular during releasing accelerator
pedal. (Other than during shift change)
● Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to functional malfunc-
tion, cut line, short, or the like
HLR/C SOL/CIRC P1767 P1767 AT-163
● TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor
value.
● TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between
gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 6 is irregular
during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift
HLR/C SOL change) P1769 P1769*2 AT-165
FNCTN
● TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of
ATF pressure switch 6 is irregular during releasing accelerator
pedal. (Other than during shift change)
LC/B SOLENOID/ ● Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to functional malfunc-
P1772 P1772 AT-167
CIRC tion, cut line, short, or the like
● TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the
LC/B SOLENOID solenoid valve.
P1774 P1774*2 AT-169
FNCT ● Condition of ATF pressure switch 2 is different from monitor value,
and relation between gear position and actual gear ratio is irregular.
MANU MODE SW/ ● When an impossible pattern of switch signals is detected, a mal-
P1815 — AT-171
CIRC function is detected.
● TCM detects that actual gear ratio is normal, and relation between
ATF PRES SW 1/ gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 1 is irregular
P1841 — AT-176
CIRC during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift
change)
● TCM detects that actual gear ratio is normal, and relation between
ATF PRES SW 3/ gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 3 is irregular
P1843 — AT-178
CIRC during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift
change)
● TCM detects that actual gear ratio is normal, and relation between
ATF PRES SW 5/ gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 5 is irregular
P1845 — AT-180
CIRC during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift
change)
● TCM detects that actual gear ratio is normal, and relation between
ATF PRES SW 6/ gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 6 is irregular
P1846 — AT-182
CIRC during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift
change)
NO DTC IS
DETECTED FUR-
THER TESTING ● No NG item has been detected. X X —
MAY BE
REQUIRED
*1: Refer to AT-42, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" .
*2: These malfunctions cannot be displayed MIL if another malfunction is assigned to MIL.
*3: For VQ35DE engine.

Edition: 2004 August AT-96 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

How to Erase Self-Diagnostic Results

1. Perform “CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE”. Refer to AT-93, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE" A
.
2. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
B

AT

SCIA5304E

E
3. Touch ”ERASE”. (The self-diagnostic results will be erased.)

H
PCIA0061E

DATA MONITOR MODE

Operation Procedure I
1. Perform “CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE”. Refer to AT-93, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE"
.
J
2. Touch “DATA MONITOR”.
NOTE:
When malfunctions detected, CONSULT-II performs “REAL-
TIME DIAGNOSIS”. Also, any malfunction detected while in K
this mode will be displayed at real time.

M
SCIA5304E

Display Items List

X: Standard, —: Not applicable, : Option
Select Monitor Item
SELEC-
Monitored item (Unit) ECU Remarks
MAIN SIG- TION
INPUT
NALS FROM
SIGNALS
MENU

VHCL/S SE·A/T (km/h) X X Revolution sensor

VHCL/S SE·MTR (km/h) X —

ACCELE POSI (0.0/8) X — Accelerator pedal position signal

Degree of opening for accelerator recognized by

the TCM
THROTTLE POSI (0.0/8) X X
For fail-safe operation, the specific value used
for control is displayed.

Edition: 2004 August AT-97 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Select Monitor Item

SELEC-
Monitored item (Unit) ECU Remarks
MAIN SIG- TION
INPUT
NALS FROM
SIGNALS
MENU

CLSD THL POS (ON-OFF) X —

Signal input with CAN communications
W/O THL POS (ON-OFF) X —

BRAKE SW (ON-OFF) X — Stop lamp switch

Gear position recognized by the TCM updated

GEAR — X
after gear-shifting

ENGINE SPEED (rpm) X X

TURBINE REV (rpm) X X

OUTPUT REV (rpm) X X

GEAR RATIO — X
Difference between engine speed and torque
TC SLIP SPEED (rpm) — X
converter input shaft speed

F SUN GR REV (rpm) — —

F CARR GR REV (rpm) — —

ATF TEMP SE 1 (V) X —

ATF TEMP SE 2 (V) X —

ATF TEMP 1 (°C) — X

ATF TEMP 2 (°C) — X

BATTERY VOLT (V) X —

ATF PRES SW 1 (ON-OFF) X X (for FR/B solenoid)

ATF PRES SW 2 (ON-OFF) X X (for LC/B solenoid)

ATF PRES SW 3 (ON-OFF) X X (for I/C solenoid)

ATF PRES SW 5 (ON-OFF) X X (for D/C solenoid)

ATF PRES SW 6 (ON-OFF) X X (for HLR/C solenoid)

PNP SW 1 (ON-OFF) X —

PNP SW 2 (ON-OFF) X —

PNP SW 3 (ON-OFF) X —

PNP SW 4 (ON-OFF) X —

1 POSITION SW (ON-OFF) X —

Selector lever position is recognized by the

TCM.
SLCT LVR POSI — X
For fail-safe operation, the specific value used
for control is displayed.

OD CONT SW (ON-OFF) X —

POWERSHIFT SW (ON-OFF) X — Not mounted but displayed.

HOLD SW (ON-OFF) X —

MANU MODE SW (ON-OFF) X —

NON M-MODE SW (ON-OFF) X —

Edition: 2004 August AT-98 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Select Monitor Item

A
SELEC-
Monitored item (Unit) ECU Remarks
MAIN SIG- TION
INPUT
NALS FROM
SIGNALS
MENU B
UP SW LEVER (ON-OFF) X —

DOWN SW LEVER (ON-OFF) X —

AT
SFT UP ST SW (ON-OFF) — —
Not mounted but displayed.
SFT DWN ST SW (ON-OFF) — —
D
ASCD·OD CUT (ON-OFF) — —

ASCD·CRUISE (ON-OFF) — —
E
ABS SIGNAL (ON-OFF) — —

ACC OD CUT (ON-OFF) — —

ICC (intelligent cruise control)
ACC SIGNAL (ON-OFF) — — F
TCS GR/P KEEP (ON-OFF) — —

TCS SIGNAL 2 (ON-OFF) — — G

TCS SIGNAL 1 (ON-OFF) — —

TCC SOLENOID (A) — X H

LINE PRES SOL (A) — X

I/C SOLENOID (A) — X

I
FR/B SOLENOID (A) — X

D/C SOLENOID (A) — X

J
HLR/C SOL (A) — X

ON OFF SOL (ON-OFF) — — LC/B solenoid

K
TCC SOL MON (A) — —

L/P SOL MON (A) — —

I/C SL MON (A) — — L

FR/B SOL MON (A) — —

D/C SOL MON (A) — — M

HLR/C SOL MON (A) — —

ON OFF SOL MON (ON-OFF) — — LC/B solenoid

P POSI IND (ON-OFF) — —

R POSI IND (ON-OFF) — —

N POSI IND (ON-OFF) — —

D POSI IND (ON-OFF) — —

4TH POSI IND (ON-OFF) — —

3RD POSI IND (ON-OFF) — —

2ND POSI IND (ON-OFF) — —

1ST POSI IND (ON-OFF) — —

MANU MODE IND (ON-OFF) — —

Edition: 2004 August AT-99 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Select Monitor Item

SELEC-
Monitored item (Unit) ECU Remarks
MAIN SIG- TION
INPUT
NALS FROM
SIGNALS
MENU

POWER M LAMP (ON-OFF) — —

F-SAFE IND/L (ON-OFF) — —

ATF WARN LAMP (ON-OFF) — — Not mounted but displayed

BACK-UP LAMP (ON-OFF) — —

STARTER RELAY (ON-OFF) — —

PNP SW3 MON (ON-OFF) — —

C/V CLB ID1 — —

C/V CLB ID2 — —

C/V CLB ID3 — —

UNIT CLB ID1 — —

UNIT CLB ID2 — —

UNIT CLB ID3 — —

TRGT GR RATIO — —

TRGT PRES TCC (kPa) — —

TRGT PRES L/P (kPa) — —

TRGT PRES I/C (kPa) — —

TRGT PRE FR/B (kPa) — —

TRGT PRES D/C (kPa) — —

TRG PRE HLR/C (kPa) — —

SHIFT PATTERN — —

DRV CST JUDGE — —

START RLY MON — —

NEXT GR POSI — —

SHIFT MODE — —

MANU GR POSI — —

VEHICLE SPEED (km/h) — X Vehicle speed recognized by the TCM.

Displays the value measured by the voltage

Voltage (V) — —
probe.
Frequency (Hz) — —

DUTY-HI (high) (%) — —

The value measured by the pulse probe is dis-
DUTY-LOW (low) (%) — —
played.
PLS WIDTH-HI (ms) — —

PLS WIDTH-LOW (ms) — —

Edition: 2004 August AT-100 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

CAN DIAGNOSTIC SUPPORT MONITOR MODE

Operation Procedure A
1. Perform “CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE” Refer to AT-93, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE" .

2. Touch “CAN DAIG SUPPORT MNTR”. Refer to LAN-4, "Precau- B

tions When Using CONSULT-II" .

AT

E
SCIA5304E

DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE

Operation Procedure F
1. Perform “CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE”. Refer to AT-93, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE"
.
2. Touch “DTC WORK SUPPORT”. G

SCIA5304E J

3. Touch select item menu.

K

SCIA0512E

4. Touch “START”.

SCIA5159E

Edition: 2004 August AT-101 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

5. Perform driving test according to “DTC Confirmation Procedure”

in “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.

SCIA5160E

● When testing conditions are satisfied, CONSULT-II screen

changes from “OUT OF CONDITION” to “TESTING”.

SCIA5161E

6. Stop vehicle.

SCIA5164E

● If “NG” appears on the screen, malfunction may exit. Go

to “Diagnostic Procedure”

SCIA5162E

Edition: 2004 August AT-102 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

7. Perform test drive to check gear shift feeling in accordance with

instructions displayed. A
8. Touch “YES” or “NO”.
9. CONSULT-II procedure is ended.
B

AT

SCIA5163E

D
● If “NG” appears on the screen, a malfunction may exit.
Go to “Diagnostic Procedure”
E

G
SCIA5162E

Display Items List H

DTC work support item Description Check item
I/C SOL FUNCTN CHECK* — —
FR/B SOL FUNCTN CHECK* — — I
D/C SOL FUNCTN CHECK* — —
HLR/C SOL FUNCTN CHECK* — —
J
LC/B SOL FUNCTN CHECK* — —
Following items for “TCC solenoid function (lock-up) ” can be con- ● TCC solenoid valve
firmed. ● Hydraulic control circuit K
TCC SOL FUNCTN CHECK ● Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed
or not)
● Self-diagnosis results (OK or NG)
L
*: Do not use, but displayed.

Edition: 2004 August AT-103 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Diagnostic Procedure without CONSULT-II ACS008CZ

OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH GST)

Refer to EC-144, "Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function" (for VQ35DE) or EC-835, "Generic Scan Tool (GST)
Function" (for VK45DE).
OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)
Refer to EC-69, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" (for VQ35DE) or EC-760, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL)" (for VK45DE).
TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)
Description
In the unlikely event of a malfunction in the electrical system, when the ignition switch is switched “ON”, the A/
T CHECK indicator lamp lights up for 2 seconds, then flashes for 8 seconds. If there is no malfunction, when
the ignition switch is turned “ON”, the indicator lamp lights up for 2 seconds. As a method for locating the sus-
pect circuit, when the self-diagnostics start signal is input, the memory for the malfunction location is output
and the A/T CHECK indicator lamp flashes to display the corresponding DTC.
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK A/T CHECK INDICATOR LAMP
1. Start the engine with selector lever in “P” position. Warm engine to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON” and “OFF” at least twice, then leave it in the “OFF” position.
3. Wait 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Does A/T CHECK indicator lamp come on for about 2 seconds?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO AT-194 .

2. JUDGEMENT PROCEDURE STEP 1

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Push shift lock release button.
3. Move selector lever from “P” to “D” position.
4. Release accelerator pedal. (Set the closed throttle position signal “ON”.)
5. Depress brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal “ON”.)
6. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
7. Wait 3 seconds.

>> GO TO 3.

3. JUDGEMENT PROCEDURE STEP 2

1. Move the selector lever to the manual shift gate side. (Manual mode switch “ON”.)
2. Release brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal “OFF”.)
3. Move the selector lever to “D” position. (Manual mode switch “OFF”.)
4. Depress brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal “ON”.)
5. Release brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal “OFF”.)
6. Depress accelerator pedal fully and release it.

>> GO TO 4.

Edition: 2004 August AT-104 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

4. JUDGEMENT PROCEDURE STEP 2 A

1. Move the selector lever to “D” position. (Manual mode switch “OFF”.)
2. Depress brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal “ON”.)
3. Release brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal “OFF”.) B
4. Depress accelerator pedal fully and release it.

AT
>> GO TO 5.

5. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE

D
Check A/T CHECK indicator lamp. Refer to AT-106, "Judgement Self-Diagnosis Code" .
If the system does not go into self-diagnostics. Refer to AT-115, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" , AT-171, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" , AT-188, "CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION AND E
WIDE OPEN THROTTLE POSITION CIRCUIT" , AT-189, "BRAKE SIGNAL CIRCUIT" .

>> DIAGNOSIS END F

Edition: 2004 August AT-105 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Judgement Self-Diagnosis Code

If there is a malfunction, the lamp lights up for the time corresponding to the suspect circuit.
No. Malfunctioning item No. Malfunctioning item
1 Revolution sensor AT-119 10 A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-137
2 Direct clutch solenoid valve AT-159 , AT-161 11 Turbine revolution sensor AT-142
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-126 , AT-
3 12 A/T interlock AT-146
128
4 Line pressure solenoid valve AT-130 13 A/T 1st engine braking AT-149
5 Input clutch solenoid valve AT-151 , AT-153 14 Start signal AT-110
6 Front brake solenoid valve AT-155 , AT-157 15 Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-134
7 Low coast brake solenoid valve AT-167 , AT-169 16 Engine speed signal AT-124
High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve AT-163 ,
8 17 CAN communication line AT-107
AT-165
9 PNP switch AT-115

SCIA5767E

Erase Self-Diagnosis
● In order to make it easier to find the cause of hard-to-duplicate malfunctions, malfunction information is
stored into the control unit as necessary during use by the user. This memory is not erased no matter how
many times the ignition switch is turned ON and OFF.
● However, this information is erased by turning ignition switch “OFF” after performing self-diagnostics or by
erasing the memory using the CONSULT-II.

Edition: 2004 August AT-106 2005 FX

 DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE

DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE PFP:23710

A
Description ACS002MB

CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent malfunction detection ability. B
Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links
with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are con-
nected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission
with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. AT

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002MC

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. D

● Diagnostic trouble code “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” with CONSULT-II or U1000 without CONSULT-II is
detected when TCM cannot communicate to other control units.
E
Possible Cause ACS002MD

● Harness or connectors
(CAN communication line is open or shorted.) F
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002ME

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch OFF and G
wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
H
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
I
3. Start engine and wait for at least 6 seconds.
4. If DTC is detected, go to AT-109, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
J

SAT014K

WITH GST L
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.

Edition: 2004 August AT-107 2005 FX

 DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE

Wiring Diagram — AT — CAN ACS0085D

TCWM0246E

Edition: 2004 August AT-108 2005 FX

 DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE

TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire A
Terminal Item Condition Data (Approx.)
color
3 L CAN-H – –
8 R CAN-L – – B

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002MF

1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT AT

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and start engine. D
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II.
Is any malfunction of the “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” indicated? E
YES >> Print out CONSULT-II screen, GO TO LAN section.
Refer to LAN-4, "Precautions When Using CONSULT-II"
.
F
NO >> INSPECTION END

G
PCIA0061E

Edition: 2004 August AT-109 2005 FX

 DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT

DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT PFP:25230

Description ACS003LO

● TCM prohibits cranking other than at “P” or “N” position.

CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS003K2

Item name Condition Display value

Selector lever in “N” and “P” positions. ON
STARTER RELAY
Selector lever in other positions. OFF

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002MH

● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “P0615 STARTER RELAY/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or 14th judgement flicker
without CONSULT-II is detected when starter relay is switched ON other than at “P” or “N” position. (Or
when switched OFF at “P” or “N” position).
Possible Cause ACS003LP

● Harness or connectors
[Starter relay and TCM circuit is open or shorted.]
● Starter relay circuit
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002MJ

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “SELECTION FROM MENU” in “DATA MONITOR” mode
for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and check monitor “STARTER
RELAY” ON/OFF.
3. Start engine.
4. Drive vehicle for at least 2 consecutive seconds.
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-112, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SAT014K

Edition: 2004 August AT-110 2005 FX

 DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT

Wiring Diagram — AT — STSIG ACS0085E

AT

TCWM0247E

Edition: 2004 August AT-111 2005 FX

 DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT

TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Terminal Item Condition Data (Approx.)
color
Selector lever in “N” and “ P” positions. Battery voltage
9 GY Starter relay
Selector lever in other positions. 0V

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002MK

1. CHECK STARTER RELAY

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “SELECTION FROM MENU” in “DATA MONITOR” mode
for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and check monitor “STARTER
RELAY” ON/OFF.

Item name Condition Display value

Selector lever in “N” and “P” positions. ON
STARTER RELAY
Selector lever in other positions. OFF

Without CONSULT-II PCIA0056E

1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)

2. Check voltage between the IPDM E/R connector and ground.
Terminal
Item Connector Shift position Voltage (Approx.)
(Wirer color)

Starter 53 “N” and “P” Battery voltage

E9 Ground
relay (GY) “R” and “D” 0V

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 2.
SCIA2103E

2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR AND IPDM E/R CONNEC-
TOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector and IPDM E/R connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector and
IPDM E/R connector.
Terminal
Item Connector Continuity
(Wire color)
A/T assembly harness con-
F44 9 (GY)
nector Yes
IPDM E/R connector E9 53 (GY)

4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.

5. Reinstall any part removed.
SCIA5439E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

Edition: 2004 August AT-112 2005 FX

 DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT

3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY A

1. Remove control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature
Sensor 2" .
2. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector and TCM connector. B
3. Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector ter-
minal and TCM connector terminal.
AT
Terminal
Item Connector Continuity
(Wire color)
A/T assembly harness con-
F44 9 (G) D
nector Yes
TCM connector F502 8 (G)

4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. E

5. Reinstall any part removed.
SCIA5440E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. F
NG >> Replace open circuit or short to ground and short to power in harness or connectors.

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM G

Check the following.
● Starter relay, Refer to SC-10, "STARTING SYSTEM" .
H
● IPDM E/R, Refer to PG-18, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE
ROOM)" .
OK or NG
I
OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Tem-
perature Sensor 2" .
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
J
5. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
K
● Refer to AT-110, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END L
NG >> GO TO 2.

Edition: 2004 August AT-113 2005 FX

 DTC P0700 TCM

DTC P0700 TCM PFP:31036

Description ACS006DU

The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The
TCM controls the A/T.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS006DV

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “TCM” with CONSULT-II or P0700* without CONSULT-II is detected when TCM is
malfunctioning.
*: For VQ35DE engine.
Possible Cause ACS006DW

TCM.
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS006DX

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA
MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. Run engine for at least 2 consecutive seconds at idle speed.
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-114, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SAT014K

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.
Diagnostic Procedure ACS006DY

1. CHECK DTC
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Perform DTC confirmation procedure, AT-114, "DTC Confirma-
tion Procedure" .
Is the “TCM” displayed again?
YES >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244,
"Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature SCIA5304E

Sensor 2" .
NO >> INSPECTION END

Edition: 2004 August AT-114 2005 FX

 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH

DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH PFP:32006

A
Description ACS002ML

● The park/neutral position (PNP) switch includes a transmission position switch.

● The transmission range switch detects the selector lever position and sends a signal to the TCM. B

CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS003K3

Item name Condition Display value AT

Selector lever in “N” and “P” positions. N/P
SLCT LVR POSI Selector lever in “R” position. R
D
Selector lever in “D” position. D

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002MM

E
● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
● Diagnostic trouble code “P705 PNP SW/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or 9th judgement flicker without CON-
SULT-II is detected under the following conditions.
F
– When TCM does not receive the correct voltage signal from the PNP switches 1, 2, 3 and 4 based on the
gear position.
– When no other position but “P” position is detected from “N” positions.
G
Possible Cause ACS002MN

● Harness or connectors
[Park/neutral position (PNP) switches 1, 2, 3 and 4 and TCM circuit is open or shorted.] H
● Park/neutral position (PNP) switches 1, 2, 3 and 4
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002MO
I
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE: J
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
K
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SHIGNALS” in “DATA L
MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 2 M
consecutive seconds.
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-117, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SAT014K

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.

Edition: 2004 August AT-115 2005 FX

 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH

Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW ACS0085F

TCWM0248E

Edition: 2004 August AT-116 2005 FX

 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002MP

1. CHECK PNP SW CIRCUIT A

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) B
2. Select “SELECTION FROM MENU” in “DATA MONITOR” mode
for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Check if correct selector lever position (N/P, R or D) is displayed AT
as selector lever is moved into each position.

Item name Condition Display value D

Selector lever in N and P positions. N/P
SLCT LVR POSI Selector lever in R position. R
E
Selector lever in D position. D PCIA0034E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. F
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT G

Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-184, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-
CUIT" .
OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
I
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following.
J
● A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. K
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Edition: 2004 August AT-117 2005 FX

 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH

4. CHECK SUB-HARNESS
1. Remove control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature
Sensor 2" .
2. Disconnect park/neutral position switch connector and TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between park/neutral position switch connector
terminals and TCM connector terminals.
Terminal
Item Connector Continuity
(Wire color)
Park/neutral position switch
F505 1 (BR)
connector Yes
TCM connector F503 13 (BR)
Park/neutral position switch
F505 2 (W)
connector Yes
SCIA5457E
TCM connector F503 11 (W)
Park/neutral position switch
F505 3 (GY)
connector Yes
TCM connector F503 12 (GY)
Park/neutral position switch
F505 5 (L)
connector Yes
TCM connector F503 14 (L)

4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.

5. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Tem-
perature Sensor 2" .
NG >> Replace open circuit or short to ground and short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
● Refer to AT-115, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 2.

Edition: 2004 August AT-118 2005 FX

 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)

DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) PFP:32702

A
Description ACS002MQ

The revolution sensor detects the revolution of the idler gear parking pawl lock gear and emits a pulse signal.
The pulse signal is sent to the TCM which converts it into vehicle speed. B
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS003K4

Item name Condition Display value (km/h) AT

VHCL/S SE·A/T During driving Approximately matches the speedometer reading.

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002MR

D
● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
● Diagnostic trouble code “P0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT” with CONSULT-II or 1st judgement flicker without
CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. E
– When TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor.
– After ignition switch is turned ON, irregular signal input from vehicle speed sensor MTR before the vehicle
starts moving. F
Possible Cause ACS002MS

● Harness or connectors G
(Sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● Revolution sensor
● Vehicle speed sensor MTR H
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002MT

CAUTION:
● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. I
● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
J
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
K
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for L
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START”.
4. Drive vehicle and check for an increase of “VHCL/S SE·A/T” M
value in response to “VHCL/S SE·MTR” value.
If the check result is NG, go to AT-122, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the check result is OK, go to following step.
5. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
6. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 SAT014K
consecutive seconds.
VHCL SPEED SE: 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.
If the check result is NG, go to AT-122, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the check result is OK, go to following step.
7. Maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds.
ENGINE SPEED: 3,500 rpm or more
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position

Edition: 2004 August AT-119 2005 FX

 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)

Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.
8. If DTC is detected, go to AT-122, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.

Edition: 2004 August AT-120 2005 FX

 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)

Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T ACS0085G

AT

TCWM0249E

Edition: 2004 August AT-121 2005 FX

 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002MU

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. Read out the value of “VHCL/S SE·A/T” while driving.
Check the value changes according to driving speed.

Item name Condition Display value (km/h)

Approximately matches
VHCL/S SE·A/T During driving
the speedometer reading.
SCIA2148E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-184, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-
CUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check the following.
● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connec-
tor.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Edition: 2004 August AT-122 2005 FX

 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)

4. CHECK SUB-HARNESS A
1. Remove control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature
Sensor 2" .
2. Disconnect park/neutral position switch connector and TCM connector. B
3. Check continuity between park/neutral position switch connector
terminals and TCM connector terminals.
AT
Terminal
Item Connector Continuity
(Wire color)
Park/neutral position switch
F505 8 (Y) D
connector Yes
TCM connector F503 20 (Y)
Park/neutral position switch
connector
F505 9 (R) E
Yes
SCIA5458E
TCM connector F503 17 (R)
Park/neutral position switch
F505 10 (B) F
connector Yes
TCM connector F503 16 (B)

4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. G

5. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. H
NG >> Replace open circuit or short to ground and short to power in harness or connectors.

5. REPLACE THE REVOLUTION SENSOR AND CHECK DTC I

1. Replace the revolution sensor. Refer to AT-264, "Revolution Sensor Components (2WD Models Only)"
(2WD models) or AT-291, "Disassembly" , AT-279, "Components" (AWD models).
J
2. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-119, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
K
NG >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Tem-
perature Sensor 2" .

6. CHECK DTC L

Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.

● Refer to AT-119, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . M
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 2.

Edition: 2004 August AT-123 2005 FX

 DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL

DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL PFP:24825

Description ACS002MV

The engine speed signal is sent from the ECM to the TCM.
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS003K5

Item name Condition Display value (rpm)

ENGINE SPEED Engine running Closely matches the tachometer reading.

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002MW

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “P0725* ENGINE SPEED SIG” with CONSULT-II or 16th judgement flicker with-
out CONSULT-II is detected when TCM does not receive the ignition signal from ECM during engine
cranking or running.
*: For VQ35DE engine.
Possible Cause ACS002MX

● Harness or connectors
(ECM to TCM circuit is open or shorted.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002MY

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.(Do not start engine.)
2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS“ in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T”
with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 10
consecutive seconds.
VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
ACCELE POSI: More than 1/8
Selector lever: “D” position
4. If DTC is detected, go to AT-125, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SAT014K

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.

Edition: 2004 August AT-124 2005 FX

 DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002MZ

1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE A

Perform the self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-104, "Diagnostic Pro-
cedure without CONSULT-II" . B
Is a malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the results?
YES >> Check CAN communication line. Refer to AT-107, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
NO >> GO TO 2. AT

2. CHECK DTC WITH TCM

D
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for E
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. While monitoring engine speed, check for engine speed change
corresponding to wide-open throttle position signal.
F
Item name Condition Display value (rpm)
Closely matches the
ENGINE SPEED Engine running
tachometer reading. G

PCIA0041E

H
With GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Check the ignition signal circuit.
● Refer to EC-648, "IGNITION SIGNAL" (for VQ35DE) or EC-1339, "IGNITION SIGNAL" (for J
VK45DE).

3. CHECK DTC
K
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
● Refer to AT-124, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG L
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 4.
M
4. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-184, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-
CUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check the following.
● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connec-
tor.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Tem-
perature Sensor 2" .
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Edition: 2004 August AT-125 2005 FX

 DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE PFP:31940

Description ACS002N0

● The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is activated, with the gear in D4 , D5 by the TCM in response
to signals sent from the vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sen-
sor). Torque converter clutch piston operation will then be controlled.
● Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid temperature is too low.
● When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 1/8) in lock-up condition, the engine speed should not
change abruptly. If there is a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock-up.
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS002N1

Item name Condition Display value (Approx.)

Slip lock-up is active 0.2 - 0.4 A
TCC SOLENOID
Lock-up is active 0.4 - 0.6 A

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002N2

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “P0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or 3rd judgement flicker with-
out CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions.
– When TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.
– When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause ACS002N3

● Torque converter clutch solenoid valve

● Harness or connectors
(Solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002N4

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.(Do not start engine.)
2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T”
with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START”.
4. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5
consecutive seconds.
VHCL SPEED SE: 80 km/h (50 MPH) or more
ACCELE POSI: 0.5/8 - 1.0/8
SELECTOR LEVER: “D” position
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions SAT014K

required for this test.

5. If DTC is detected go to AT-127, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.

Edition: 2004 August AT-126 2005 FX

 DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002N5

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL A

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. B
2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T”
with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine. AT
4. Read out the value of “TCC SOLENOID” while driving.
Item name Condition Display value (Approx.) D
Slip lock-up is active 0.2 - 0.4 A
TCC SOLENOID
Lock-up is active 0.4 - 0.6 A
E
OK or NG SCIA4793E

OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
F
2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-184, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR- G
CUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. H
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM I

Check the following.
● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connec-
tor. J
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Tem-
perature Sensor 2" . K
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

4. CHECK DTC L
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
● Refer to AT-126, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
M
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 2.

Edition: 2004 August AT-127 2005 FX

 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)

DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) PFP:31940

Description ACS002N6

This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 5th gear position or the torque converter clutch
does not lock-up as instructed by the TCM. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or
shorted) but also by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation,
etc.
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS003KT

Item name Condition Display value (Approx.)

Slip lock-up is active 0.2 - 0.4 A
TCC SOLENOID
Lock-up is active 0.4 - 0.6 A

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002N7

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “P0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN” with CONSULT-II or 3rd judgement flicker without
CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions.
– When A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is good.
– When TCM detects as irregular by comparing difference value with slip rotation.
Possible Cause ACS002N8

● Harness or connectors
(Solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
● Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
● Hydraulic control circuit
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002N9

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and Select “TCC SOL FNCTN CHECK” of “DTC
WORK SUPPORT” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch
“START”.
2. Accelerate vehicle to more than 80 km/h (50 MPH) and maintain
the following condition continuously until “TESTING” has turned
to “COMPLETE”. (It will take approximately 30 seconds after
“TESTING” shows.)
ACCELE POSI: More than 1.0/8 (at all times during step 4)
TCC SOLENOID: 0.4 - 0.6 A
Selector lever: “D” position
[Reference speed: Constant speed of more than 80 km/h (50 SAT014K
MPH)]
– Make sure “GEAR” shows “5”.
– For shift schedule, refer to AT-353, "Vehicle Speed at Which Lock-Up Occurs/Releases" .
– If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. In
case a 1st trip DTC other than P0744 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
DTC”.
3. Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.)
Refer to AT-129, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Refer to shift schedule, AT-353, "Vehicle Speed at Which Lock-Up Occurs/Releases" .

Edition: 2004 August AT-128 2005 FX

 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”. A

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002NA

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL B

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. AT
2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T”
with CONSULT-II.
3. Start the engine. D
4. Read out the value of “TCC SOLENOID” while driving.
Item name Condition Display value (Approx.)
E
Slip lock-up is active 0.2 - 0.4 A
TCC SOLENOID
Lock-up is active 0.4 - 0.6 A
OK or NG SCIA4793E F
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
G
2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-184, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-
CUIT" . H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. I

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

J
Check the following.
● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connec-
tor.
K
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Tem-
perature Sensor 2" . L
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

4. CHECK DTC
M
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
● Refer to AT-128, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 2.

Edition: 2004 August AT-129 2005 FX

 DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE

DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE PFP:31940

Description ACS002NB

The line pressure solenoid valve regulates the oil pump discharge pressure to suit the driving condition in
response to a signal sent from the TCM.
The line pressure duty cycle value is not consistent when the closed throttle position signal is ON. To
confirm the line pressure duty cycle at low pressure, the accelerator (throttle) should be open until the
closed throttle position signal is OFF.
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS003KU

Item name Condition Display value (Approx.)

LINE PRES SOL During driving 0.2 - 0.6 A

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002NC

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “P0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or 4th judgement flicker without
CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions.
– When TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.
– When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause ACS002ND

● Harness or connectors
(Solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
● Line pressure solenoid valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002NE

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.(Do not start engine.)
2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T”
with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START”.
4. Engine start and wait at least 5 seconds.
5. If DTC is detected, go to “AT-131, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SAT014K

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.

Edition: 2004 August AT-130 2005 FX

 DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002NF

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL A

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. B
2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T”
with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine. AT
4. Read out the value of “LINE PRES SOL” while driving.
Item name Condition Display value (Approx.) D
LINE PRES SOL During driving 0.2 - 0.6 A
OK or NG
E
OK >> GO TO 4. SCIA4793E

NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT F

Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-184, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-
CUIT" .
G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. H
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following. I
● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connec-
tor.
OK or NG J
OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Tem-
perature Sensor 2" .
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. K

4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. L
● Refer to AT-130, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
M
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 2.

Edition: 2004 August AT-131 2005 FX

 DTC P1702 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (RAM)

DTC P1702 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (RAM) PFP:31036

Description ACS002NL

The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The
TCM controls the A/T.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002NM

● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “P1702 TCM·RAM” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM memory RAM is
malfunctioning.
Possible Cause ACS002NN

● TCM
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002NO

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.(Do not start engine.)
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA
MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START”.
4. Start engine.
5. Run engine for at least 2 consecutive seconds at idle speed.
6. If DTC is detected, go to AT-132, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SAT014K

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002NP

1. CHECK DTC
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Perform “DTC confirmation procedure”. Refer to AT-132, "DTC
Confirmation Procedure" .
Is the “TCM·RAM” displayed again?
YES >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244,
"Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature SCIA5304E

Sensor 2" .
NO >> INSPECTION END

Edition: 2004 August AT-132 2005 FX

 DTC P1703 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (ROM)

DTC P1703 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (ROM) PFP:31036

A
Description ACS002NQ

The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The
TCM controls the A/T. B
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002NR

● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. AT

● Diagnostic trouble code “P1703 TCM·ROM” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM memory ROM is
malfunctioning.
Possible Cause ACS002NS D
● TCM
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002NT E
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. F
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to ON.(Do not start engine.) G
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA
MONITOR” mode for A/T with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START”. H
4. Start engine.
5. Run engine for at least 2 consecutive seconds at idle speed.
I
6. If DTC is detected, go to AT-133, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SAT014K
J

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002NU

1. CHECK DTC K

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) L
2. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II.
3. Touch “ERASE”. M
4. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Perform “DTC confirmation procedure”, AT-133, "DTC Confirma-
tion Procedure" .
Is the “TCM·ROM” displayed again?
YES >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244,
"Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature SCIA5304E

Sensor 2" .
NO >> INSPECTION END

Edition: 2004 August AT-133 2005 FX

 DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR PFP:22620

Description ACS002O0

Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, accelerator pedal position sensor, throttle
position sensor, etc. The actuator sends a signal to the ECM, and ECM sends signals to TCM with CAN com-
munication.
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS006C4

Item name Condition Display value (Approx.)

Released accelerator pedal. 0.0/8
ACCELE POSI
Fully depressed accelerator pedal. 8/8
Released accelerator pedal. 0.0/8
THROTTLE POSI
Fully depressed accelerator pedal. 8/8

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002O1

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “P1705* TP SEN/CIRC A/T” with CONSULT-II or 15th judgement flicker without
CONSULT-II is detected when TCM does not receive the proper accelerator pedal position signals (input
by CAN communication) from ECM.
*: For VQ35DE engine.
Possible Cause ACS002O2

● Harness or connectors
(Sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002O3

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START”.
4. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
5. If DTC is detected, go to “AT-135, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SAT014K

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.

Edition: 2004 August AT-134 2005 FX

 DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002O4

1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE A

Perform the self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-104, "Diagnostic Pro-
cedure without CONSULT-II" . B
Is a malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the results?
YES >> Check CAN communication line. Refer to AT-107, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
NO >> GO TO 2. AT

2. CHECK DTC WITH TCM

D
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for E
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Depress accelerator pedal and read out the value of “ACCELE
POSI” and “THROTTLE POSI”.
F
Display value
Item name Condition
(Approx.)
Released accelerator pedal. 0.0/8 G
ACCELE POSI
Fully depressed accelerator pedal. 8/8
PCIA0070E
Released accelerator pedal. 0.0/8
THROTTLE POSI H
Fully depressed accelerator pedal. 8/8

4. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULT MODE" I
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
K
3. CHECK DTC WITH ECM
With CONSULT-II
L
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “ENGINE” with CON-
SULT-II. Refer to EC-132, "CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE)"
(for VQ35DE) or EC-822, "CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE)" M
(for VK45DE).
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Check the DTC detected item. Refer to EC-132, "CON- SAT014K
SULT-II Function (ENGINE)" (for VQ35DE) or EC-822,
"CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE)" (for VK45DE).
● If CAN communication line is detected, go to AT-107, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION
LINE" .

Edition: 2004 August AT-135 2005 FX

 DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
● Refer to AT-134, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 5.

5. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-184, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-
CUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check the following.
● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connec-
tor.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Tem-
perature Sensor 2" .
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Edition: 2004 August AT-136 2005 FX

 DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT PFP:31940

A
Description ACS002O5

The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature and sends a signal to the TCM.
B
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS002O6

Item name Condition °C (°F) Display value (Approx.)

ATF TEMP SE 1 2.2 - 1.8 - 0.6 V AT
0 (32) - 20 (68) - 80 (176)
ATF TEMP SE 2 2.2 - 1.7 - 0.45 V

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002O7 D

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
● Diagnostic trouble code “P1710 (A/T), P0710 (ENGINE) ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or 10th
judgement flicker without CONSULT-II is detected when TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage E
from the sensor.
Possible Cause ACS002O8
F
● Harness or connectors
(Sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● A/T fluid temperature sensors 1 and/or 2 G
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002O9

CAUTION:
H
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. I
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
J
1. Turn ignition switch ON.(Do not start engine.)
2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T”
with CONSULT-II.
K
3. Touch “START”.
4. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 10
minutes (Total). (It is not necessary to maintain continuously.)
L
VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-139, "Diagnostic Procedure" . M
SAT014K

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.

Edition: 2004 August AT-137 2005 FX

 DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS ACS0085H

TCWM0251E

Edition: 2004 August AT-138 2005 FX

 DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

Diagnostic Procedure ACS00861

1. CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 SIGNAL A

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. B
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “ATF TEMP SE 1”. AT

Item name Condition °C (°F) Display value (Approx.)

ATF TEMP SE 1 0 (32) - 20 (68) - 80 (176) 2.2 - 1.8 - 0.6 V D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3. E
PCIA0039E

2. CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 SIGNAL

F
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for G
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “ATF TEMP SE 2”.
H
Item name Condition °C (°F) Display value (Approx.)
ATF TEMP SE 2 0 (32) - 20 (68) - 80 (176) 2.2 - 1.7 - 0.45 V
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 5. PCIA0039E

J
3. CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1
Check A/T fluid temperature sensor 1. Refer to AT-141, "A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1" .
K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Tem-
perature Sensor 2" . L

4. CHECK SUB-HARNESS
M
1. Disconnect park/neutral position switch connector and TCM connector.
2. Check continuity between park/neutral position switch connector
terminals and TCM connector terminals.
Terminal
Item Connector Continuity
(Wire color)
Park/neutral position switch
F505 6 (G)
connector Yes
TCM connector F503 19 (G)
Park/neutral position switch
F505 7 (OR)
connector Yes
SCIA5461E
TCM connector F503 18 (OR)
3. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace open circuit or short to ground and short to power in harness or connectors.

Edition: 2004 August AT-139 2005 FX

 DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

5. CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2

Check A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Refer to AT-141, "A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace the A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Refer to AT-252, "A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SEN-
SOR 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" .

6. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

1. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector and TCM connector.
2. Check continuity between A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 con-
nector terminals and TCM connector terminals.
Terminal
Item Connector Continuity
(Wire color)
A/T fluid temperature sen-
F507 1 (W/Y)
sor 2 connector Yes
TCM connector F502 3 (W/Y)
A/T fluid temperature sen-
F507 2 (W/R)
sor 2 connector Yes
SCIA5462E
TCM connector F502 5 (W/R)

3. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace open circuit or short to ground and short to power in harness or connectors.

7. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

1. Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-184, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND
CIRCUIT" .
2. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Tem-
perature Sensor 2" .
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

8. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
● Refer to AT-137, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 1.

Edition: 2004 August AT-140 2005 FX

 DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

Component Inspection ACS00862

A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 A

1. Remove control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature
Sensor 2" .
2. Check resistance between terminals. B

Temperature Resistance
Name Connector Terminal
°C (°F) (Approx.) (kΩ)
AT
0 (32) 15
A/T fluid temperature
F505 6-7 20 (68) 6.5
sensor 1
80 (176) 0.9 D
3. If NG, replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244,
"Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
SCIA5463E
E

A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2

1. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Refer to AT-252, "A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" . F
2. Check resistance between terminals.

Name Connector Terminal

Temperature Resistance G
°C (°F) (Approx.) (kΩ)
0 (32) 10
A/T fluid temperature H
F507 1-2 20 (68) 4
sensor 2
80 (176) 0.5

3. If NG, replace the A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Refer to AT-

I
252, "A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 REMOVAL AND
INSTALLATION" . SCIA5271E

Edition: 2004 August AT-141 2005 FX

 DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR

DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR PFP:31935

Description ACS002OB

The turbine revolution sensor detects input shaft rpm (revolutions per minute). It is located on the input side of
the automatic transmission. Monitors revolution of sensor 1 and sensor 2 for non-standard conditions.
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS00865

Item name Condition Display value (rpm)

TURBINE REV During driving (lock-up ON) Approximately matches the engine speed.

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002OC

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “P1716 TURBINE REV S/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or 11th judgement flicker with-
out CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions.
– When TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor.
– When TCM detects an irregularity only at position of 4th gear for turbine revolution sensor 2.
Possible Cause ACS002OD

● Harness or connectors
(Sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● Turbine revolution sensor 1 and/or 2
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002OE

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.(Do not start engine.)
2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T”
with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START”.
4. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5
consecutive seconds.
VHCL SPEED SE: 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more
ENGINE SPEED: 1,500 rpm or more
ACCELE POSI: 0.5/8 or more
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position (Turbine revolution sensor 1): 4th or 5th posi- SAT014K

tion
Gear position (Turbine revolution sensor 2): All position
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-143, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.

Edition: 2004 August AT-142 2005 FX

 DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002OF

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL A

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. B
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Vehicle start and read out the value of “TURBINE REV”. AT

Item name Condition Display value (rpm)

TURBINE REV During driving (lock-up ON)

Approximately matches D
the engine speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. E
PCIA0041E
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT F

Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-184, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-
CUIT" .
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
H
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following. I
● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connec-
tor.
OK or NG J
OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Tem-
perature Sensor 2" .
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
K
4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. L
● Refer to AT-142, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END M
NG >> GO TO 2.

Edition: 2004 August AT-143 2005 FX

 DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR

DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR PFP:24814

Description ACS002OG

The vehicle speed sensor·MTR signal is transmitted from combination meter to TCM by CAN communication
line. The signal functions as an auxiliary device to the revolution sensor when it is malfunctioning. The TCM
will then use the vehicle speed sensor·MTR signal.
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS003KE

Item name Condition Display value (Approx.) (km/h)

VHCL/S SE·MTR During driving Approximately matches the speedometer reading.

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002OH

● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “P1721 VHE SPD SE/CIR·MTR” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM does
not receive the proper vehicle speed sensor MTR signal (input by CAN communication) from combination
meter.
Possible Cause ACS002OI

● Harness or connectors
(Sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002OJ

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.(Do not start engine.)
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START”.
4. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5
consecutive seconds.
ACCELE POSI: 1/8 or less
VHCL SPEED SE: 30 km/h (17 MPH) or more
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-145, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SAT014K

Edition: 2004 August AT-144 2005 FX

 DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002OK

1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE A

Perform the self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-104, "Diagnostic Pro-
cedure without CONSULT-II" . B
Is malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the result?
YES >> Check CAN communication line. Refer to AT-107, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
NO >> GO TO 2. AT

2. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL

D
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for E
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Drive vehicle and read out the value of “VHCL/S SE·MTR”.
Item name Condition Display value (Approx.) (km/h) F
Approximately matches the
VHCL/S SE·MTR During driving
speedometer reading.

OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 4. SCIA2148E
NG >> GO TO 3.
H
3. CHECK COMBINATION METERS
Check combination meters. Refer to DI-15, "Trouble Diagnosis" . I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. J
4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. K
● Refer to AT-144, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END L
NG >> GO TO 5.

5. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT M

Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-184, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-
CUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check the following.
● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connec-
tor.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Tem-
perature Sensor 2" .
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Edition: 2004 August AT-145 2005 FX

 DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK

DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK PFP:00000

Description ACS002OL

● Fail-safe function to detect interlock conditions.

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002OM

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “P1730 A/T INTERLOCK” with CONSULT-II or 12th judgement flicker without
CONSULT-II is detected when TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor and
switch.
● TCM monitors and compares gear position and conditions of each ATF pressure switch when gear is
steady.
Possible Cause ACS002ON

● Harness or connectors
(Solenoid and switch circuit is open or shorted.)
● Low coast brake solenoid valve
● ATF pressure switch 2
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002OO

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.(Do not start engine.)
2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T”
with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START”.
4. Start engine.
5. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 2
consecutive seconds.
Selector lever: “D” position
6. If DTC is detected, go to AT-147, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SAT014K

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.
Judgement of A/T Interlock ACS002OP

When A/T Interlock is judged to be malfunctioning, the vehicle should be fixed in 2nd gear, and should be set
in a condition in which it can travel.
When one of the following fastening patterns is detected, the fail-safe function in correspondence with the indi-
vidual pattern should be performed.

Edition: 2004 August AT-146 2005 FX

 DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK

A/T INTERLOCK COUPLING PATTERN TABLE

●: NG, X: OK A
Clutch pressure output pattern after fail-safe func-
ATF pressure switch output
tion
Fail-safe
Gear position SW6 B
SW3 SW5 SW1 SW2 function
(HLR/ I/C HLR/C D/C FR/B LC/B L/U
(I/C) (D/C) (FR/B) (LC/B)
C)
Held in AT
3rd – X X – ● OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
2nd gear
A/T interlock
Held in
coupling pat- 4th – X X – ● OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
2nd gear
tern D
Held in
5th X X – X ● OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
2nd gear

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002OQ E

1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT-II F
1. Drive vehicle.
2. Stop vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. G
4. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II.
H

I
SCIA5304E

J
Without CONSULT-II
1. Drive vehicle.
2. Stop vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF. K
3. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
4. Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-104, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" .
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Check low coast brake solenoid valve circuit and function. Refer to AT-167, "DTC P1772 LOW
COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE" ,AT-169, "DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID M
VALVE FUNCTION" .

2. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
● Refer to AT-146, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 3.

3. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-184, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-
CUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Edition: 2004 August AT-147 2005 FX

 DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check the following.
● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connec-
tor.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Tem-
perature Sensor 2" .
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Edition: 2004 August AT-148 2005 FX

 DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING

DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING PFP:00000

A
Description ACS002OR

Fail-safe function to prevent sudden decrease in speed by engine brake other than at M1 position.
B
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS003KG

Item name Condition Display value

Low coast brake engaged. Refer to AT-21 . ON AT
ON OFF SOL
Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . OFF
Low coast brake engaged. Refer to AT-21 . ON
ATF PRES SW 2 D
Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . OFF

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002OS

E
● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
● Diagnostic trouble code “P1731 A/T 1ST E/BRAKING” with CONSULT-II or 13th judgement flicker without
CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions.
F
– When TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor.
– When TCM monitors each ATF pressure switch and solenoid monitor value, and detects as irregular when
engine brake of 1st gear acts other than at M1 position.
G
Possible Cause ACS002OT

● Harness or connectors
(Sensor circuit is open or shorted.) H
● Low coast brake solenoid valve
● ATF pressure switch 2
I
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002OU

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously preformed, always turn ignition switch OFF and J
wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II K
1. Turn ignition switch ON.(Do not start engine.)
2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T”
with CONSULT-II. L
3. Touch “START”.
4. Start engine.
M
5. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 2
consecutive seconds.
ENGINE SPEED: 1,200 rpm
Selector lever: “M” position
Gear position: 1st gear SAT014K
6. If DTC is detected, go to AT-150, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

Edition: 2004 August AT-149 2005 FX

 DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002OV

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS

With CONSULT-II
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “SELECTION FROM MENU” in “DATA MONITOR” mode
for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Drive vehicle in the “M” position (1st gear), and confirm the ON/
OFF actuation of “ATF PRES SW 2” and “ON OFF SOL”.
Item name Condition Display value
Low coast brake engaged. Refer to AT-21 . ON
ON OFF SOL
Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . OFF

ATF PRES Low coast brake engaged. Refer to AT-21 . ON SCIA4670E

SW 2 Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . OFF

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-184, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-
CUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check the following.
● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connec-
tor.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Tem-
perature Sensor 2" .
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
● Refer to AT-149, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 2.

Edition: 2004 August AT-150 2005 FX

 DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE PFP:31940

A
Description ACS002OW

Input clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle
speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be shifted to the B
optimum position.
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS003KS

AT
Item name Condition Display value (Approx.)
Input clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . 0.6 - 0.8 A
I/C SOLENOID
Input clutch engaged. Refer to AT-21 . 0 - 0.05 A D

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002OX

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. E

● Diagnostic trouble code “P1752 I/C SOLENOID/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or 5th judgement flicker without
CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions.
– When TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. F
– When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause ACS002OY
G
● Harness or connectors
(Solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
● Input clutch solenoid valve H
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002OZ

CAUTION:
I
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. J
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
K
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T”
with CONSULT-II.
L
3. Touch “START”.
4. Start engine.
5. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 M
consecutive seconds.
ACCELE POSI: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 3rd Þ 4th Gear (I/C ON/OFF) SAT014K
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test.
6. If DTC is detected go to “AT-152, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.

Edition: 2004 August AT-151 2005 FX

 DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002P0

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T”
with CONSULT-II.
3. Start the engine.
4. Read out the value of “I/C SOLENOID” while driving.
Display value
Item name Condition
(Approx.)
Input clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . 0.6 - 0.8 A
I/C SOLENOID
Input clutch engaged. Refer to AT-21 . 0 - 0.05 A
SCIA4793E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-184, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-
CUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check the following.
● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connec-
tor.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Tem-
perature Sensor 2" .
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
● Refer to AT-159, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 2.

Edition: 2004 August AT-152 2005 FX

 DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION PFP:31940

A
Description ACS002P1

● Input clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehi-
cle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be B
shifted to the optimum position.
● This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical mal-
function such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation. AT
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS003KI

Item name Condition Display value (Approx.)

D
Input clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . 0.6 - 0.8 A
I/C SOLENOID
Input clutch engaged. Refer to AT-21 . 0 - 0.05 A
Input clutch engaged. Refer to AT-21 . ON E
ATF PRES SW 3
Input clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . OFF

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002P2 F

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
● Diagnostic trouble code “P1754 I/C SOLENOID FNCTN” with CONSULT-II or 5th judgement flicker with-
out CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. G
– When TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between gear position and condition of
ATF pressure switch 3 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
– When TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 3 is irregular H
during releasing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
Possible Cause ACS002P3
I
● Harness or connectors
(Solenoid and switch circuits are open or shorted.)
● Input clutch solenoid valve J
● ATF pressure switch 3
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002P4
K
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE: L
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
M
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions.
ACCELE POSI: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 3rd Þ 4th Gear (I/C ON/OFF)
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
3. Perform step “2” again.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, then perform step “1” to “3” again.
SAT014K
5. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II. If DTC (P1754) is detected, go to AT-154, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC (P1752) is detected, go to AT-152, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC (P1843) is detected, go to AT-179, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

Edition: 2004 August AT-153 2005 FX

 DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.
Diagnostic Procedure ACS002P5

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “SELECTION FROM MENU” in “DATA MONITOR” mode
for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Drive vehicle in “D” position (3rd Þ 4th gear), and confirm the
ON/OFF actuation of “ATF PRES SW 3” and electrical current
value of “I/C SOLENOID”.
Display value
Item name Condition
(Approx.)
Input clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . 0.6 - 0.8 A
I/C SOLENOID
SCIA4795E
Input clutch engaged. Refer to AT-21 . 0 - 0.05 A
Input clutch engaged. Refer to AT-21 . ON
ATF PRES SW 3
Input clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . OFF

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-184, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-
CUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check the following.
● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connec-
tor.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Tem-
perature Sensor 2" .
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

4. CHECK DTC
Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
● Refer to AT-153, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 2.

Edition: 2004 August AT-154 2005 FX

 DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE

DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE PFP:31940

A
Description ACS002P6

Front brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle
speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be shifted to the B
optimum position.
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS003KJ

AT
Item name Condition Display value (Approx.)
Front brake engaged. Refer to AT-21 . 0.6 - 0.8 A
FR/B SOLENOID
Front brake disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . 0 - 0.05 A D

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002P7

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. E

● Diagnostic trouble code “P1757 FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or 6th judgement flicker with-
out CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions.
– When TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. F
– When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause ACS002P8
G
● Harness or connectors
(Solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
● Front brake solenoid valve H
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002P9

CAUTION:
I
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. J
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
K
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T”
with CONSULT-II.
L
3. Touch “START”.
4. Start engine.
5. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 M
consecutive seconds.
ACCELE POSI: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 3rd Þ 4th Gear (FR/B ON/OFF) SAT014K
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test.
6. If DTC is detected go to AT-156, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.

Edition: 2004 August AT-155 2005 FX

 DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002PA

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.(Do not start engine.)
2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T”
with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. Read out the value of “FR/B SOLENOID” while driving.
Display value
Item name Condition
(Approx.)
Front brake engaged. Refer to AT-21 . 0.6 - 0.8 A
FR/B SOLENOID
Front brake disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . 0 - 0.05 A
SCIA4793E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-184, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-
CUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check the following.
● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connec-
tor.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Tem-
perature Sensor 2" .
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
● Refer to AT-142, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 2.

Edition: 2004 August AT-156 2005 FX

 DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION PFP:31940

A
Description ACS002PB

● Front brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehi-
cle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be B
shifted to the optimum position.
● This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical mal-
function such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation. AT
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS003KK

Item name Condition Display value (Approx.)

D
Front brake engaged. Refer to AT-21 . 0.6 - 0.8 A
FR/B SOLENOID
Front brake disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . 0 - 0.05 A
Front brake engaged. Refer to AT-21 . ON E
ATF PRES SW 1
Front brake disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . OFF

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002PC F

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
● Diagnostic trouble code “P1759 FR/B SOLENOID FNCT” with CONSULT-II or 6th judgement flicker with-
out CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. G
– When TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between gear position and condition of
ATF pressure switch 1 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
– When TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 1 is irregular H
during releasing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
Possible Cause ACS002PD
I
● Harness or connectors
(Solenoid and switch circuits are open or shorted.)
● Front brake solenoid valve J
● ATF pressure switch 1
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002PE
K
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE: L
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
M
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions.
ACCELE POSI: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 3rd Þ 4th Gear (FR/B ON/OFF)
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
3. Perform step “2” again.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, then perform step “1” to “3” again.
SAT014K
5. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II. If DTC (P1759) is detected, go to AT-158, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC (P1757) is detected, go to AT-156, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC (P1841) is detected, go to AT-177, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

Edition: 2004 August AT-157 2005 FX

 DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.
Diagnostic Procedure ACS002PF

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “SELECTION FROM MENU” in “DATA MONITOR” mode
for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Drive vehicle in the “D” position (3rd Þ 4th gear), and confirm
the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 1” and electrical
current value of “FR/B SOLENOID”.
Display value
Item name Condition
(Approx.)
Front brake engaged. Refer to AT-21 . 0.6 - 0.8 A
FR/B SOLENOID
SCIA4796E
Front brake disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . 0 - 0.05 A
Front brake engaged. Refer to AT-21 . ON
ATF PRES SW 1
Front brake disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . OFF

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-184, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-
CUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check the following.
● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connec-
tor.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Tem-
perature Sensor 2" .
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
● Refer to AT-157, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 2.

Edition: 2004 August AT-158 2005 FX

 DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE PFP:31940

A
Description ACS002PG

Direct clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle
speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be shifted to the B
optimum position.
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS003KL

AT
Item name Condition Display value (Approx.)
Direct clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . 0.6 - 0.8 A
D/C SOLENOID
Direct clutch engaged. Refer to AT-21 . 0 - 0.05 A D

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002PH

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. E

● Diagnostic trouble code “P1762 D/C SOLENOID/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or 2nd judgement flicker without
CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions.
– When TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. F
– When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause ACS002PI
G
● Harness or connectors
(Solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
● Direct clutch solenoid valve H
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002PJ

NOTE:
I
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
J
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.(Do not start engine.)
2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” K
with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START”.
4. Start engine. L
5. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5
consecutive seconds.
ACCELE POSI: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
M
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 1st Þ 2nd Gear (D/C ON/OFF) SAT014K
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test.
6. If DTC is detected, go to AT-160, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.

Edition: 2004 August AT-159 2005 FX

 DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002PK

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.(Do not start engine.)
2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T”
with CONSULT-II.
3. Start the engine.
4. Read out the value of “D/C SOLENOID” while driving.
Display value
Item name Condition
(Approx.)
Direct clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . 0.6 - 0.8 A
D/C SOLENOID
Direct clutch engaged. Refer to AT-21 . 0 - 0.05 A
SCIA4793E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-184, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-
CUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check the following.
● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connec-
tor.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Tem-
perature Sensor 2" .
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
● Refer to AT-159, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 2.

Edition: 2004 August AT-160 2005 FX

 DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION PFP:31940

A
Description ACS002PL

● Direct clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch,
vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be B
shifted to the optimum position.
● This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical mal-
function such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation. AT
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS003KM

Item name Condition Display value (Approx.)

D
Direct clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . 0.6 - 0.8 A
D/C SOLENOID
Direct clutch engaged. Refer to AT-21 . 0 - 0.05 A
Direct clutch engaged. Refer to AT-21 . ON E
ATF PRES SW 5
Direct clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . OFF

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002PM F

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
● Diagnostic trouble code “P1764 D/C SOLENOID FNCTN” with CONSULT-II or 2nd judgement flicker with-
out CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. G
– When TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between gear position and condition of
ATF pressure switch 5 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
– When TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 5 is irregular H
during releasing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
Possible Cause ACS002PN
I
● Harness or connectors
(Solenoid and switch circuits are open or shorted.)
● Direct clutch solenoid valve J
● ATF pressure switch 5
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002PO
K
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. L

WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. M
2. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions.
ACCELE POSI: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 1st Þ 2nd Gear (D/C ON/OFF)
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
3. Perform step “2” again.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, then perform step “1” to “3” again.
SAT014K
5. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II. If DTC (P1764) is detected, go to AT-162, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC (P1762) is detected, go to AT-160, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC (P1845) is detected, go to AT-181, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.

Edition: 2004 August AT-161 2005 FX

 DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002PP

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “SELECTION FROM MENU” in “DATA MONITOR” mode
for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Drive vehicle in the “D” position (1st Þ 2nd gear), and confirm
the display actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 5” and electrical cur-
rent value of “D/C SOLENOID”.
Display value
Item name Condition
(Approx.)
Direct clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . 0.6 - 0.8 A
D/C SOLENOID
SCIA4797E
Direct clutch engaged. Refer to AT-21 . 0 - 0.05 A
Direct clutch engaged. Refer to AT-21 . ON
ATF PRES SW 5
Direct clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . OFF

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-184, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-
CUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check the following.
● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connec-
tor.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Tem-
perature Sensor 2" .
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
● Refer to AT-161, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 2.

Edition: 2004 August AT-162 2005 FX

 DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE PFP:31940
A
Description ACS002PQ

High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP
switch, vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then B
be shifted to the optimum position.
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS003KN

AT
Item name Condition Display value (Approx.)
High and low reverse clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . 0.6 - 0.8 A
HLR/C SOL
High and low reverse clutch engaged. Refer to AT-21 . 0 - 0.05 A D

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002PR

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. E

● Diagnostic trouble code “P1767 HLR/C SOL/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or 8th judgement flicker without
CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions.
– When TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. F
– When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause ACS002PS
G
● Harness or connectors
(Solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
● High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve H
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002PT

CAUTION:
I
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. J
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
K
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START”. L
4. Start engine.
5. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5
consecutive seconds. M
ACCELE POSI: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 2nd Þ 3rd Gear (HLR/C ON/OFF)
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased SAT014K
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
6. If DTC is detected, go to AT-164, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.

Edition: 2004 August AT-163 2005 FX

 DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002PU

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T”
with CONSULT-II.
3. Start the engine.
4. Read out the value of “HLR/C SOLENOID” while driving.
Display value
Item name Condition
(Approx.)
High and low reverse clutch disengaged. Refer
0.6 - 0.8 A
to AT-21 .
HLR/C SOL SCIA4793E
High and low reverse clutch engaged. Refer to
0 - 0.05 A
AT-21 .

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-184, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-
CUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check the following.
● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connec-
tor.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Tem-
perature Sensor 2" .
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
● Refer to AT-159, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 2.

Edition: 2004 August AT-164 2005 FX

 DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION
PFP:31940 A
Description ACS002PV

● High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the B
PNP switch, vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears
will then be shifted to the optimum position.
● This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical mal-
function such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation. AT

CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS003KO

Item name Condition Display value (Approx.) D

High and low reverse clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . 0.6 - 0.8 A
HLR/C SOL
High and low reverse clutch engaged. Refer to AT-21 . 0 - 0.05 A
E
High and low reverse clutch engaged. Refer to AT-21 . ON
ATF PRES SW 6
High and low reverse clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . OFF
F
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002PW

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “P1769 HLR/C SOL FNCTN” with CONSULT-II or 8th judgement flicker without G
CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions.
– When TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between gear position and condition of
ATF pressure switch 6 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) H
– When TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 6 is irregular
during releasing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
Possible Cause ACS002PX I
● Harness or connectors
(Solenoid and switch circuits are open or shorted.)
J
● High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
● ATF pressure switch 6
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002PY K
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE: L
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. M
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions.
ACCELE POSI: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 2nd Þ 3rd Gear (HLR/C ON/OFF)
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
3. Perform step “2” again.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, then perform step “1” to “3” again.
SAT014K
5. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II. If DTC (P1769) is detected, go to AT-166, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC (P1767) is detected, go to AT-164, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC (P1846) is detected, go to AT-183, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

Edition: 2004 August AT-165 2005 FX

 DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.
Diagnostic Procedure ACS002PZ

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS

With CONSULT-II
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “SELECTION FROM MENU” in “DATA MONITOR” mode
for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Drive vehicle in the “D” position (2nd Þ 3rd gear), and confirm
the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 6” and electrical
current value of “HLR/C SOL”.
Display value
Item name Condition
(Approx.)
High and low reverse clutch disengaged.
0.6 - 0.8 A
Refer to AT-21 . SCIA4798E
HLR/C SOL
High and low reverse clutch engaged. Refer
0 - 0.05 A
to AT-21 .
High and low reverse clutch engaged. Refer
ON
to AT-21 .
ATF PRES SW 6
High and low reverse clutch disengaged.
OFF
Refer to AT-21 .

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-184, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-
CUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check the following.
● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connec-
tor.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Tem-
perature Sensor 2" .
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
● Refer to AT-165, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 2.

Edition: 2004 August AT-166 2005 FX

 DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE

DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE PFP:31940

A
Description ACS002Q0

Low coast brake solenoid valve is turned ON or OFF by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP
switch, vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then B
be shifted to the optimum position.
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS003KP

AT
Item name Condition Display value
Low coast brake engaged. Refer to AT-21 . ON
ON OFF SOL
Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . OFF D

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002Q1

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. E

● Diagnostic trouble code “P1772 LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or 7th judgement flicker with-
out CONSULT-II is detected when TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the sole-
noid valve. F
Possible Cause ACS002Q2

● Harness or connectors
(Solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) G
● Low coast brake solenoid valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002Q3 H
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. I
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) J
2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T”
with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START”. K
4. Start engine.
5. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5
L
consecutive seconds.
Selector lever: “M” position
Gear position: “M1-1st” or “M2-2nd” gear (LC/B ON/OFF)
6. If DTC is detected, go to AT-168, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SAT014K
M

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.

Edition: 2004 August AT-167 2005 FX

 DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002Q4

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “SELECTION FROM MENU” in “DATA MONITOR” mode
for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. Read out the value of “ON OFF SOL” while driving.
Item name Condition Display value
Low coast brake engaged. Refer to AT-21 . ON
ON OFF SOL
Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . OFF
OK or NG SCIA4794E

OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-184, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-
CUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check the following.
● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connec-
tor.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Tem-
perature Sensor 2" .
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
● Refer to AT-167, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 2.

Edition: 2004 August AT-168 2005 FX

 DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION PFP:31940

A
Description ACS002Q5

● Low coast brake solenoid valve is turned ON or OFF by the TCM in response to signals sent from the
PNP switch, vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears B
will then be shifted to the optimum position.
● This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical mal-
function such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation. AT
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS003KQ

Item name Condition Display value

D
Low coast brake engaged. Refer to AT-21 . ON
ON OFF SOL
Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . OFF
Low coast brake engaged. Refer to AT-21 . ON E
ATF PRES SW 2
Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . OFF

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002Q6 F

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
● Diagnostic trouble code “P1774 LC/B SOLENOID FNCT” with CONSULT-II or 7th judgement flicker with-
out CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. G
– When TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between gear position and condition of
ATF pressure switch 2 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
– When TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 2 is irregular H
during releasing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
Possible Cause ACS002Q7
I
● Harness or connectors
(Solenoid and switch circuits are open or shorted.)
● Low coast brake solenoid valve J
● ATF pressure switch 2
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002Q8
K
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE: L
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
M
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions.
Selector lever: “M” position
Gear position: “M1-1st” or “M2-2nd” gear (LC/B ON/OFF)
3. Perform step “2” again.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, then perform step “1” to “3” again.
5. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II. If DTC (P1774) is detected, go to AT-170, "Diagnostic Proce-
dure" .
If DTC (P1772) is detected, go to AT-168, "Diagnostic Proce- SAT014K
dure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.

Edition: 2004 August AT-169 2005 FX

 DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002Q9

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “SELECTION FROM MENU” in “DATA MONITOR” mode
for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Drive vehicle in the manual mode (“M1-1st” or “M2-2nd” gear),
and confirm the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 2” and
“ON OFF SOL”.
Item name Condition Display value
Low coast brake engaged. Refer to AT-21 . ON
ON OFF SOL
Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . OFF
SCIA4794E
Low coast brake engaged. Refer to AT-21 . ON
ATF PRES SW 2
Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . OFF

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-184, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-
CUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check the following.
● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connec-
tor.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Tem-
perature Sensor 2" .
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
● Refer to AT-169, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 2.

Edition: 2004 August AT-170 2005 FX

 DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH

DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH PFP:34901

A
Description ACS002QA

Manual mode switch is installed in A/T device. It sends manual mode switch, shift up and shift down switch
signals to TCM. B
TCM sends the switch signals to unified meter and A/C amp. By CAN communication line. Then manual mode
switch position is indicated on the A/T indicator. For inspection, refer to AT-190, "A/T INDICATOR CIRCUIT" .
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ACS002QB AT
Item name Condition Display Value
Manual shift gate position (neutral) ON
MANU MODE SW D
Other than the above OFF
Manual shift gate position OFF
NON M-MODE SW
Other than the above ON E
selector lever: + side ON
UP SW LEVER
Other than the above OFF
F
selector lever: - side ON
DOWN SW LEVER
Other than the above OFF
G
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002QC

● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “P1815 MANU MODE SW/CIR” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM moni- H
tors Manual mode, Non manual mode, Up or Down switch signal, and detects as irregular when impossi-
ble input pattern occurs 1 second or more.
Possible Cause ACS002QD I
● Harness or connectors
(These switches circuit is open or shorted.)
● Manual mode select switch (Into control device) J
● Manual mode position select switch (Into control device)
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002QE K
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. L
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) M
2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T”
with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. Move selector lever to “M” position.
5. Drive vehicle for at least 2 consecutive seconds.
6. If DTC is detected, go to AT-174, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SAT014K

Edition: 2004 August AT-171 2005 FX

 DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH

Wiring Diagram — AT — MMSW ACS0085I

TCWM0252E

Edition: 2004 August AT-172 2005 FX

 DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH

AT

TCWM0421E

Edition: 2004 August AT-173 2005 FX

 DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH

TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Terminal Item Condition Data (Approx.)
color
3 L CAN-H – –
8 R CAN-L – –
Selector lever in “N” and “P” positions. Battery voltage
9 GY Starter relay
Selector lever in other positions. 0V

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002QF

1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE

Perform the self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
Is a malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the results?
YES >> Check CAN communication line. Refer to AT-107, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out ON/OFF switching action of “MANU MODE SW”,
“NON M-MODE SW”, “UP SW LEVER”, “DOWN SW LEVER”.
Item name Condition Display Value
Manual shift gate position (neutral) ON
MANU MODE SW
Other than the above OFF
Manual shift gate position OFF SCIA4988E
NON M-MODE SW
Other than the above ON
selector lever: +side ON
UP SW LEVER
Other than the above OFF
selector lever: -side ON
DOWN SW LEVER
Other than the above OFF

Without CONSULT-II
Drive vehicle in the manual mode, and confirm that the actual gear position and the meter's indication of the
position mutually coincide when the selector lever is shifted to the “+ (up)” or “- (down)” side (1st ⇔ 5th gear).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check the following items.
● Manual mode switch. Refer to AT-175, "Component Inspection" .
● Pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
● Open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connector for A/T device (manual mode
switch).
● Unified meter and A/C amp. Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Edition: 2004 August AT-174 2005 FX

 DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH

4. CHECK DTC A
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
● Refer to AT-171, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG B
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 5.
AT
5. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-184, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-
D
CUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. E
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

F
Check the following.
● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connec-
tor. G
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Tem-
perature Sensor 2" . H
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection ACS002QG

MANUAL MODE SWITCH I

Check continuity between terminals.
Item Position Connector Terminal Continuity J
Manual mode Auto 9 - 10
select switch Manual 6-9
M67 Yes K
Manual mode UP 8-9
position select
switch DOWN 7-9

L
SCIA2112E

Edition: 2004 August AT-175 2005 FX

 DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1

DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1 PFP:25240

Description ACS002QI

Fail-safe function to detect front brake clutch solenoid valve condition.

CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS003KR

Item name Condition Display value

Front brake engaged. Refer to AT-21 . ON
ATF PRES SW 1
Front brake disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . OFF

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002QJ

● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “P1841 ATF PRES SW 1/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM detects
that actual gear ratio is normal, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 1
is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
Possible Cause ACS002QK

● ATF pressure switch 1

● Harness or connectors
(Switch circuit is open or shorted.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002QL

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions.
ACCELE POSI: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 3rd Þ 4th Gear (FR/B ON/OFF)
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
3. Perform step “2” again.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, then perform step “1” to “3” again.
SAT014K
5. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II.
If DTC (P1841) is detected, go to AT-177, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC (P1757) is detected, go to AT-156, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

Edition: 2004 August AT-176 2005 FX

 DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002QM

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL A

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. B
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA
MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Drive vehicle in the “D” position (3rd Þ 4th gear), and confirm AT
the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 1”.
Item name Condition Display value
D
Front brake engaged. Refer to AT-21 . ON
ATF PRES SW 1
Front brake disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . OFF

OK or NG E
PCIA0067E

OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
F
2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-184, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-
G
CUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. H
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

I
Check the following.
● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connec-
tor. J
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Tem-
perature Sensor 2" . K
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

4. CHECK DTC L
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
● Refer to AT-176, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG M
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 2.

Edition: 2004 August AT-177 2005 FX

 DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3

DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3 PFP:25240

Description ACS002QN

Fail-safe function to detect input clutch solenoid valve condition.

CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS003JZ

Item name Condition Display value

Input clutch engaged. Refer to AT-21 . ON
ATF PRES SW 3
Input clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . OFF

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002QO

● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “P1843 ATF PRES SW 3/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM detects
that actual gear ratio is normal, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 3
is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
Possible Cause ACS002QP

● ATF pressure switch 3

● Harness or connectors
(Switch circuit is open or shorted.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002QQ

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions.
ACCELE POSI: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 3rd Þ 4th Gear (I/C ON/OFF)
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
3. Perform step “2” again.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, then perform step “1” to “3” again.
SAT014K
5. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II.
If DTC (P1843) is detected, go to AT-179, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC (P1752) is detected, go to AT-152, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

Edition: 2004 August AT-178 2005 FX

 DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002QR

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL A

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. B
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA
MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Drive vehicle in the “D” position (3rd Þ 4th gear), and confirm AT
the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 3”.
Item name Condition Display value
D
Input clutch engaged. Refer to AT-21 . ON
ATF PRES SW 3
Input clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . OFF

OK or NG E
PCIA0067E

OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
F
2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-184, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-
G
CUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. H
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

I
Check the following.
● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connec-
tor. J
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Tem-
perature Sensor 2" . K
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

4. CHECK DTC L
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
● Refer to AT-178, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG M
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 2.

Edition: 2004 August AT-179 2005 FX

 DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5

DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5 PFP:25240

Description ACS002QS

Fail-safe function to detect direct clutch solenoid valve condition.

CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS003K0

Item name Condition Display value

Direct clutch engaged. Refer to AT-21 . ON
ATF PRES SW 5
Direct clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . OFF

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002QT

● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “P1845 ATF PRES SW 5/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM detects
that actual gear ratio is normal, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 5
is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
Possible Cause ACS002QU

● ATF pressure switch 5

● Harness or connectors
(Switch circuit is open or shorted.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002QV

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions.
ACCELE POSI: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 1st Þ 2nd Gear (D/C ON/OFF)
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
3. Perform step “2” again.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, then perform step “1” to “3” again.
SAT014K
5. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II.
If DTC (P1845) is detected, go to AT-181, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC (P1762) is detected, go to AT-160, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

Edition: 2004 August AT-180 2005 FX

 DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002QW

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL A

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. B
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA
MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Drive vehicle in the “D” position (1st Þ 2nd gear), and confirm AT
the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 5”.
Item name Condition Display value
D
Direct clutch engaged. Refer to AT-21 . ON
ATF PRES SW 5
Direct clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-21 . OFF

OK or NG E
PCIA0067E

OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
F
2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-184, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-
G
CUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. H
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

I
Check the following.
● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connec-
tor. J
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Tem-
perature Sensor 2" . K
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

4. CHECK DTC L
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
● Refer to AT-180, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG M
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 2.

Edition: 2004 August AT-181 2005 FX

 DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6

DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6 PFP:25240

Description ACS002QX

Fail-safe function to detect high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve condition.
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS003K1

Item name Condition Display value

High and low reverse clutch engaged. Refer to AT-21 . ON
ATF PRES SW 6
High and low reverse clutch disengaged Refer to AT-21 . OFF

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002QY

● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “P1846 ATF PRES SW 6/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM detects
that actual gear ratio is normal, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 6
is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
Possible Cause ACS002QZ

● ATF pressure switch 6

● Harness or connectors
(Switch circuit is open or shorted.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002R0

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions.
ACCELE POSI: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 2nd Þ 3rd Gear (HLR/C ON/OFF)
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
3. Perform step “2” again.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, then perform step “1” to “3” again.
SAT014K
5. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II.
If DTC (P1846) is detected, go to AT-183, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC (P1767) is detected, go to AT-164, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

Edition: 2004 August AT-182 2005 FX

 DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002R1

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL A

With CONSULT-II
1. Start the engine. B
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA
MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Drive vehicle in the “D” position (2nd Þ 3rd gear), and confirm AT
the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 6”.
Item name Condition Display value
D
High and low reverse clutch engaged.
ON
Refer to AT-21 .
ATF PRES SW 6
High and low reverse clutch disengaged E
OFF PCIA0067E
Refer to AT-21 .

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. F
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT G

Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-184, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-
CUIT" .
OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
I
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following.
J
● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connec-
tor.
OK or NG
K
OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Tem-
perature Sensor 2" .
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
L
4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. M
● Refer to AT-182, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 2.

Edition: 2004 August AT-183 2005 FX

 MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT PFP:00100

Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN ACS0085N

TCWM0385E

Edition: 2004 August AT-184 2005 FX

 MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire A
Terminal Item Condition Data (Approx.)
color
Power supply
1 LG Always Battery voltage
(Memory back-up)
B
Power supply
2 LG Always Battery voltage
(Memory back-up)
5 B Ground Always 0V AT

– Battery voltage
D
6 Y Power supply

– 0V
E
10 B Ground Always 0V

Diagnostic Procedure ACS00863

F
1. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE STEP 1
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
G
2. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector.
3. Check voltage between A/T assembly harness connector termi-
nals and ground.
H
Terminal
Item Connector Voltage
(Wire color)
1 (LG) - Ground I
Battery voltage
TCM F44 2 (LG) - Ground
6 (Y) - Ground 0V SCIA2104E
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
K
2. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE STEP 2
1. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector. L
2. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
3. Check voltage between A/T assembly harness connector termi-
nals and ground. M
Terminal
Item Connector Voltage
(Wire color)
1 (LG) - Ground
TCM F44 2 (LG) - Ground Battery voltage
6 (Y) - Ground SCIA2105E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

Edition: 2004 August AT-185 2005 FX

 MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check the following.
● Harness for short or open between battery and A/T assembly harness connector terminals 1, 2
● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and A/T assembly harness connector terminal 6
● 10A fuse (No. 37, located in the fuse and fusible link block) and 10A fuse (No. 83, located in the IPDM E/
R)
● Ignition switch, Refer to PG-3, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

4. CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector ter-
minals and ground.
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.

SCIA2106E

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check the following.
● The A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

6. PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG-1 >> Self-diagnosis does not activate: GO TO 7.
NG-2 >> DTC is displayed: Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULT MODE" .

Edition: 2004 August AT-186 2005 FX

 MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

7. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY A

1. Remove control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature
Sensor 2" .
2. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector and TCM connector. B
3. Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector ter-
minals and TCM connector terminals.
AT
Terminal
Item Connector Continuity
(Wire color)
A/T assembly harness con-
F44 1 (W) D
nector Yes
TCM connector F502 9 (W)
A/T assembly harness con-
nector
F44 2 (GY) E
Yes
SCIA5464E
TCM connector F502 10 (GY)
A/T assembly harness con-
F44 6 (R) F
nector Yes
TCM connector F502 4 (R)

G
4. Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector ter-
minals and TCM connector terminals.
Terminal H
Item Connector Continuity
(Wire color)
A/T assembly harness con-
F44 5 (B)
nector Yes I
TCM connector F504 21 (B)
A/T assembly harness con-
F44 10 (Y)
nector Yes J
SCIA5465E
TCM connector F504 22 (Y)
5. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
K
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Tem-
perature Sensor 2" .
NG >> Replace open circuit or short to ground and short to power in harness or connectors. L

Edition: 2004 August AT-187 2005 FX

 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION AND WIDE OPEN THROTTLE POSITION CIR-
CUIT

CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION AND WIDE OPEN THROTTLE POSITION CIR-

CUIT PFP:18002

CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS006CR

Item name Condition Display value

Released accelerator pedal. ON
CLSO THL POS
Fully depressed accelerator pedal. OFF
Fully depressed accelerator pedal. ON
W/O THL POS
Released accelerator pedal. OFF

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002R2

1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE

Perform the self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-104, "Diagnostic Pro-
cedure without CONSULT-II" .
Is a malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the results?
YES >> Check CAN communication line. Refer to AT-107, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Depress accelerator pedal and read out the value of “CLSD THL
POS” and “W/O THL POS”.
Monitor Item
Accelerator Pedal Operation
CLSD THL POS W/O THL POS
Released ON OFF
Fully depressed OFF ON PCIA0070E

OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Check the following items. If NG, repair or replace damaged parts.
● Perform the self-diagnosis for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Refer to EC-136, "SELF-DIAG
RESULTS MODE" (for VQ35DE) or EC-826, "SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE" (for VK45DE).
● Open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

● Pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

Edition: 2004 August AT-188 2005 FX

 BRAKE SIGNAL CIRCUIT

BRAKE SIGNAL CIRCUIT PFP:25320

A
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS006CS

Item name Condition Display value

Depressed brake pedal. ON B
BRAKE SW
Released brake pedal. OFF

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002R3 AT

1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Perform the self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-104, "Diagnostic Pro- D
cedure without CONSULT-II" .
Is a malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the results?
YES >> Check CAN communication line. Refer to AT-107, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . E
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT F

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
G
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out ON/OFF switching action of the “BRAKE SW”.
H
Item name Condition Display value
Depressed brake pedal. ON
BRAKE SW I
Released brake pedal. OFF
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END J
NG >> GO TO 3. PCIA0070E

3. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH

K
Check continuity between stop lamp switch harness connector termi-
nals 1 and 2. Refer to AT-191, "Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC" .
Condition Continuity
L

When brake pedal is depressed Yes

When brake pedal is released No
M
Check stop lamp switch after adjusting brake pedal — refer to
BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END SCIA2144E

NG >> Check the following items. If NG, repair or replace dam-

aged parts.
● Harness for short or open between battery and stop lamp switch.

● Harness for short or open between stop lamp switch and unified meter and A/C amp.

Edition: 2004 August AT-189 2005 FX

 A/T INDICATOR CIRCUIT

A/T INDICATOR CIRCUIT PFP:24810

Description ACS009AU

TCM sends the switch signals to combination meters. By CAN communication line. Then manual mode switch
position is indicated on the A/T indicator.
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS009AV

Item name Condition Display value

GEAR During driving 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

Diagnostic Procedure ACS009AW

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T”
with CONSULT-II and read out the value of “GEAR”.
3. Drive vehicle in the manual mode, and confirm that the actual
gear position and the meter's indication of the position mutually
coincide when the selector lever is shifted to the “+ (up)” or “-
(down)” side (1st ⇔ 5th gear).
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END PCIA0065E

NG >> Check the following.

A/T INDICATOR SYMPTOM CHART
Items Presumed Location of Trouble

The actual gear position does not change, or shifting into the Manual mode switch
manual mode is not possible (no gear shifting in the manual Refer to AT-171, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" .
mode possible). A/T main system (Fail-safe function actuated)
The A/T indicator is not indicated. ● Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .

The actual gear position changes, but the A/T indicator is not indi- Perform the self-diagnosis function.
cated. ● Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .

The actual gear position and the indication on the A/T indicator Perform the self-diagnosis function.
do not coincide. ● Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
Only a specific position or positions is/are not indicated on the A/ Check the unified meter and A/C amp.
T indicator. Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" .

Edition: 2004 August AT-190 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS PFP:00007

A
Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC ACS0080R

AT

TCWM0254E

Edition: 2004 August AT-191 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

TCWM0268E

Edition: 2004 August AT-192 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

AT

TCWM0269E

Edition: 2004 August AT-193 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Terminal Item Condition Data (Approx.)
color
3 L CAN-H – –
K-line (CONSULT-
4 PU The terminal is connected to the data link connector for CONSULT-II. –
II signal)
Selector lever in “R” position. 0V
Back-up lamp
7 OR
relay Selector lever in other positions. Battery voltage

8 R CAN-L – –

A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On ACS0080S

SYMPTOM:
A/T CHECK indicator lamp does not come on for about 2 seconds when turning ignition switch to
“ON”.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-104, "TCM SELF-DIAG-
NOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" .
Is a malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the results?
YES >> Check CAN communication line. Refer to AT-107, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK A/T CHECK INDICATOR LAMP CIRCUIT

Check the combination meter. Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

3. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-184, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-
CUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Edition: 2004 August AT-194 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position ACS0080T

SYMPTOM: A
● Engine cannot be started with selector lever in “P” or “N” position.
● Engine can be started with selector lever in “D”or “R” position.
B
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT
AT
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-104, "TCM SELF-DIAG-
NOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" .
Do the self-diagnosis results indicate PNP switch? D
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-115, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" .
NO >> GO TO 2.
E
2. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE
Check the control linkage. F
● Refer to AT-236, "Checking of A/T Position" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. G
NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-236, "Adjustment of
A/T Position" .
H

SCIA2119E I

3. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM

Check starting system. Refer to SC-10, "STARTING SYSTEM" . J
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
K
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Edition: 2004 August AT-195 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed ACS0080U

SYMPTOM:
Even though the selector lever is set in the “P” position, the parking mechanism is not actuated,
allowing the vehicle to be moved when it is pushed.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-104, "TCM SELF-DIAG-
NOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" .
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-115, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" .

2. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE

Check the control linkage.
● Refer to AT-236, "Checking of A/T Position" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-236, "Adjustment of
A/T Position" .

SCIA2119E

3. CHECK PARKING COMPONENTS

Check parking components. Refer to AT-256, "Parking Components (2WD Models Only)" (2WD models) or
AT-291, "Disassembly" (AWD models).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

4. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged,
repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-65, "Symp-
tom Chart" (Symptom No.65).

SCIA5199E

Edition: 2004 August AT-196 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves ACS0080V

SYMPTOM: A
Vehicle moves forward or backward when selecting “N” position.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE B
1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-104, "TCM SELF-DIAG- AT
NOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" .
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-115, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION D
SWITCH" .
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE E

Check the control linkage.

● Refer to AT-236, "Checking of A/T Position" . F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-236, "Adjustment of G
A/T Position" .

SCIA2119E

I
3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Refill ATF.
K

SAT638A
M
4. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged,
repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-65, "Symp-
tom Chart" (Symptom No.67).

SCIA5199E

Edition: 2004 August AT-197 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

5. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. Refer to AT-57, "Check at Idle" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 6.

6. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-90, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness
connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Large Shock (“N” to “D” Position) ACS0080W

SYMPTOM:
A noticeable shock occurs when the selector lever is shifted from “N” to “D” position.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-104, "TCM SELF-DIAG-
NOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" .
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic results?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-
106, "Judgement Self-Diagnosis Code" .
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. ENGINE IDLE SPEED

Check the engine idle speed. Refer to EC-83, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check" (for VQ35DE) or EC-
774, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check" (for VK45DE).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Adjust engine idle speed. Refer to EC-83, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check" (for VQ35DE)
or EC-774, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check" (for VK45DE).

3. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE

Check the control linkage.
● Refer to AT-236, "Checking of A/T Position" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-236, "Adjustment of
A/T Position" .

SCIA2119E

Edition: 2004 August AT-198 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

4. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL A

Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. B
NG >> Refill ATF.

AT

D
SAT638A

5. CHECK LINE PRESSURE E

Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in “D” position. Refer
to AT-54, "LINE PRESSURE TEST" .
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG - 1 >> Line pressure high: GO TO 6.
NG - 2 >> Line pressure low: GO TO 7. G

SAT494G

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM I

1. Check control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sen-
sor 2" . J
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-291, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following.
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-309, "Oil Pump" . K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. L

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

M
1. Check control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sen-
sor 2" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-291, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following.
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-309, "Oil Pump" .
– Power train system. Refer to AT-291, "DISASSEMBLY" .
– Transmission case. Refer to AT-291, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Edition: 2004 August AT-199 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

8. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.

SCIA5199E

9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-65,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.1).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

10. CHECK SYMPTOM

Check again. Refer to AT-57, "Check at Idle" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 11.

11. CHECK TCM

1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-90, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness
connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Edition: 2004 August AT-200 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position ACS0080X

SYMPTOM: A
The vehicle does not creep in the “R” position. Or an extreme lack of acceleration is observed.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE B
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-104, "TCM SELF-DIAG- AT
NOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" .
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic results?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT- D
106, "Judgement Self-Diagnosis Code" .
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE E

Check the control linkage.

● Refer to AT-236, "Checking of A/T Position" . F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-236, "Adjustment of G
A/T Position" .

SCIA2119E

I
3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Refill ATF.
K

SAT638A
M
4. CHECK STALL TEST
Check stall revolution with selector lever in “M” and “R” positions.
Refer to AT-52, "STALL TEST" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
OK in “M” position, NG in “R” position>>GO TO 5
NG in both “M” and “R” positions>>GO TO 8.

SAT493G

Edition: 2004 August AT-201 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-291, "DISASSEMBLY" .
2. Check the following.
– Reverse brake. Refer to AT-291, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

6. CHECK LINE PRESSURE

Check the line pressure with the engine idling. Refer to AT-54, "LINE
PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG - 1 >> Line pressure high: GO TO 7.
NG - 2 >> Line pressure low: GO TO 8.

SAT494G

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Check control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sen-
sor 2" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-291, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following.
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-309, "Oil Pump" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Check control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sen-
sor 2" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-291, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following.
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-309, "Oil Pump" .
– Power train system. Refer to AT-291, "DISASSEMBLY" .
– Transmission case. Refer to AT-291, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Edition: 2004 August AT-202 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

9. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION A

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" . B
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 13. AT

SCIA5199E
E
10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-65,
F
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.43).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. G
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

11. CHECK SYMPTOM

H
Check again. Refer to AT-57, "Check at Idle" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END I
NG >> GO TO 12.

12. CHECK TCM J

1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-90, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness
connector. K
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. L

13. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

M
● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-65,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.43).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Edition: 2004 August AT-203 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position ACS0080Y

SYMPTOM:
Vehicle does not creep forward when selecting “D” position.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-104, "TCM SELF-DIAG-
NOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" .
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic results?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-
106, "Judgement Self-Diagnosis Code" .
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE

Check the control linkage.
● Refer to AT-236, "Checking of A/T Position" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-236, "Adjustment of
A/T Position" .

SCIA2119E

3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL

Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Refill ATF.

SAT638A

4. CHECK STALL TEST

Check stall revolution with selector lever in “D” position. Refer to AT-
52, "STALL TEST" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 7.

SAT493G

Edition: 2004 August AT-204 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

5. CHECK LINE PRESSURE A

Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in “D” position. Refer
to AT-54, "LINE PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG B
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG - 1 >> Line pressure high: GO TO 6.
NG - 2 >> Line pressure low: GO TO 7. AT

D
SAT494G

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM E

1. Check control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sen-
sor 2" .
F
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-291, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following.
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-309, "Oil Pump" . G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. H
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Check control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sen- I
sor 2" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-291, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following. J
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-309, "Oil Pump" .
– Power train system. Refer to AT-291, "DISASSEMBLY" .
K
– Transmission case. Refer to AT-291, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. L
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

8. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION

M
1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 12.

SCIA5199E

Edition: 2004 August AT-205 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-65,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.43).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

10. CHECK SYMPTOM

Check again. Refer to AT-57, "Check at Idle" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 11.

11. CHECK TCM

1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-90, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness
connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-65,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.43).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ACS0080Z

SYMPTOM:
Vehicle cannot be started from D1 on cruise test - Part 1.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Check if vehicle creeps in “R” position.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Refer to AT-201, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position" .

2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-104, "TCM SELF-DIAG-
NOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)"
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic results?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-
106, "Judgement Self-Diagnosis Code" .
NO >> GO TO 3.

Edition: 2004 August AT-206 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

3. CHECK ACCELERATOR POSITION (APP) SENSOR A

Check accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor. Refer to AT-134, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SEN-
SOR"
OK or NG B
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor.
AT
4. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Refill ATF.
E

SAT638A
G
5. CHECK LINE PRESSURE
Check line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-54, "LINE H
PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. I
NG - 1 >> Line pressure high: GO TO 6.
NG - 2 >> Line pressure low: GO TO 7.
J

SAT494G K

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Check control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sen- L
sor 2" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-291, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following. M
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-309, "Oil Pump" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Edition: 2004 August AT-207 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Check control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sen-
sor 2" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-291, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following.
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-309, "Oil Pump" .
– Power train system. Refer to AT-291, "DISASSEMBLY" .
– Transmission case. Refer to AT-291, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

8. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 12.

SCIA5199E

9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-65,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.23).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

10. CHECK SYMPTOM

Check again. Refer to AT-58, "Cruise Test - Part 1" , AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 2" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 11.

11. CHECK TCM

1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-90, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness
connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Edition: 2004 August AT-208 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-65,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.23).
OK or NG B
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT
A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 ACS00810

SYMPTOM:
The vehicle does not shift-up from the D1 to D2 gear at the specified speed.
D
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM E
Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” position and vehicle can be started from D1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. F
NG >> Refer to AT-204, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position" , AT-206, "Vehicle Cannot Be
Started From D1" .
G
2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-104, "TCM SELF-DIAG-
NOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . H
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic results?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-
106, "Judgement Self-Diagnosis Code" . I
NO >> GO TO 3.

3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL J

Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
K
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Refill ATF.
L

M
SAT638A

4. CHECK LINE PRESSURE

Check line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-54, "LINE
PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG - 1 >> Line pressure high: GO TO 5.
NG - 2 >> Line pressure low: GO TO 6.

SAT494G

Edition: 2004 August AT-209 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Check control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sen-
sor 2" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-291, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following.
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-309, "Oil Pump" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Check control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sen-
sor 2" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-291, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following.
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-309, "Oil Pump" .
– Power train system. Refer to AT-291, "DISASSEMBLY" .
– Transmission case. Refer to AT-291, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

7. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 11.

SCIA5199E

8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-65,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.10).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

9. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. Refer to AT-58, "Cruise Test - Part 1" , AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 2" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 10.

Edition: 2004 August AT-210 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

10. CHECK TCM A

1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-90, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness
connector. B
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. AT

11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

D
● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-65,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.10).
OK or NG
E
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 ACS00811 F
SYMPTOM:
The vehicle does not shift-up from D2 to D3 gear at the specified speed.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE G

1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM

Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” position and vehicle can be started from D1. H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Refer to AT-204, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position" , AT-206, "Vehicle Cannot Be I
Started From D1" .

2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS J

Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-104, "TCM SELF-DIAG-
NOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" .
K
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic results?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-
106, "Judgement Self-Diagnosis Code" .
L
NO >> GO TO 3.

3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL

M
Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Refill ATF.

SAT638A

Edition: 2004 August AT-211 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

4. CHECK LINE PRESSURE

Check line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-54, "LINE
PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG - 1 >> Line pressure high: GO TO 5.
NG - 2 >> Line pressure low: GO TO 6.

SAT494G

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Check control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sen-
sor 2" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-291, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following.
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-309, "Oil Pump" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Check control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sen-
sor 2" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-291, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following.
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-309, "Oil Pump" .
– Power train system. Refer to AT-291, "DISASSEMBLY" .
– Transmission case. Refer to AT-291, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

7. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 11.

SCIA5199E

Edition: 2004 August AT-212 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-65,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.11).
OK or NG B
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT
9. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. Refer to AT-58, "Cruise Test - Part 1" , AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 2" .
D
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 10.
E
10. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-90, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . F
2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness
connector.
OK or NG G
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
H
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-65,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.11). I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. J

A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 ACS00812

SYMPTOM:
K
● The vehicle does not shift-up from the D3 to D4 gear at the specified speed.
● The vehicle does not shift-up from the D3 to D4 gear unless A/T is warmed up.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE L
1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” position and vehicle can be started from D1. M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Refer to AT-204, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position" , AT-206, "Vehicle Cannot Be
Started From D1" .

2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-104, "TCM SELF-DIAG-
NOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" .
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic results?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-
106, "Judgement Self-Diagnosis Code" .
NO >> GO TO 3.

Edition: 2004 August AT-213 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL

Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Refill ATF.

SAT638A

4. CHECK LINE PRESSURE

Check line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-54, "LINE
PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG - 1 >> Line pressure high: GO TO 5.
NG - 2 >> Line pressure low: GO TO 6.

SAT494G

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Check control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sen-
sor 2" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-291, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following.
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-309, "Oil Pump" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Check control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sen-
sor 2" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-291, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following.
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-309, "Oil Pump" .
– Power train system. Refer to AT-291, "DISASSEMBLY" .
– Transmission case. Refer to AT-291, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Edition: 2004 August AT-214 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

7. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION A

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" . B
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 11. AT

SCIA5199E
E
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-65,
F
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.12).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. G
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

9. CHECK SYMPTOM
H
Check again. Refer to AT-58, "Cruise Test - Part 1" , AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 2" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END I
NG >> GO TO 10.

10. CHECK TCM J

1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-90, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness
connector. K
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. L

11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

M
● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-65,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.12).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Edition: 2004 August AT-215 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D5 ACS00813

SYMPTOM:
● The vehicle does not shift-up from the D4 to D5 gear at the specified speed.
● The vehicle does not shift-up from the D4 to D5 gear unless A/T is warmed up.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” position and vehicle can be started from D1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Refer to AT-204, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position" , AT-206, "Vehicle Cannot Be
Started From D1" .

2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-104, "TCM SELF-DIAG-
NOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" .
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic results?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-
106, "Judgement Self-Diagnosis Code" .
NO >> GO TO 3.

3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL

Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Refill ATF.

SAT638A

4. CHECK LINE PRESSURE

Check line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-54, "LINE
PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG - 1 >> Line pressure high: GO TO 5.
NG - 2 >> Line pressure low: GO TO 6.

SAT494G

Edition: 2004 August AT-216 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A

1. Check control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sen-
sor 2" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-291, "DISASSEMBLY" . B
3. Check the following.
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-309, "Oil Pump" .
OK or NG AT
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
D
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Check control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sen- E
sor 2" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-291, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following. F
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-309, "Oil Pump" .
– Power train system. Refer to AT-291, "DISASSEMBLY" .
– Transmission case. Refer to AT-291, "DISASSEMBLY" . G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. H

7. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION

I
1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 11.
K

SCIA5199E

8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM M

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-65,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.13).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

9. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. Refer to AT-58, "Cruise Test - Part 1" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 10.

Edition: 2004 August AT-217 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

10. CHECK TCM

1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-90, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness
connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-65,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.13).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
A/T Does Not Perform Lock-Up ACS00814

SYMPTOM:
A/T does not perform lock-up at the specified speed.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-104, "TCM SELF-DIAG-
NOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" .
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic results?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-
106, "Judgement Self-Diagnosis Code" .
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL

Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Refill ATF.

SAT638A

3. CHECK LINE PRESSURE

Check line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-54, "LINE
PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG - 1 >> Line pressure high: GO TO 4.
NG - 2 >> Line pressure low: GO TO 5.

SAT494G

Edition: 2004 August AT-218 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A

1. Check control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sen-
sor 2" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-291, "DISASSEMBLY" . B
3. Check the following.
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-309, "Oil Pump" .
OK or NG AT
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
D
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Check control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sen- E
sor 2" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-291, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following. F
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-309, "Oil Pump" .
– Power train system. Refer to AT-291, "DISASSEMBLY" .
– Transmission case. Refer to AT-291, "DISASSEMBLY" . G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. H

6. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION

I
1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 10.
K

SCIA5199E

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM M

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-65,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.24).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

8. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. Refer to AT-58, "Cruise Test - Part 1" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 9.

Edition: 2004 August AT-219 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

9. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-90, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness
connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-65,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.24).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
A/T Does Not Hold Lock-Up Condition ACS00815

SYMPTOM:
The lock-up condition cannot be maintained for more than 30 seconds.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-104, "TCM SELF-DIAG-
NOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" .
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic results?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-
106, "Judgement Self-Diagnosis Code" .
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL

Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Refill ATF.

SAT638A

Edition: 2004 August AT-220 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

3. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION A

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" . B
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 7. AT

SCIA5199E
E
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-65,
F
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.25).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. G
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

5. CHECK SYMPTOM
H
Check again. Refer to AT-58, "Cruise Test - Part 1" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END I
NG >> GO TO 6.

6. CHECK TCM J
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-90, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness
connector. K
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. L

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

M
● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-65,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.25).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Edition: 2004 August AT-221 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

Lock-Up Is Not Released ACS00816

SYMPTOM:
The lock-up condition cannot be cancelled even after releasing the accelerator pedal.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-104, "TCM SELF-DIAG-
NOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" .
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic results?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-
106, "Judgement Self-Diagnosis Code" .
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. Refer to AT-58, "Cruise Test - Part 1" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 3.

3. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-90, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness
connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle ACS00817

SYMPTOM:
When a shift-down is performed, the engine speed does not smoothly return to the idling speed.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Refill ATF.

SAT638A

2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-104, "TCM SELF-DIAG-
NOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" .
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic results?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-
106, "Judgement Self-Diagnosis Code" .
NO >> GO TO 3.

Edition: 2004 August AT-222 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

3. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION A

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" . B
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 7. AT

SCIA5199E
E
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-65,
F
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.72).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. G
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

5. CHECK SYMPTOM
H
Check again. Refer to AT-58, "Cruise Test - Part 1" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END I
NG >> GO TO 6.

6. CHECK TCM J
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-90, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness
connector. K
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. L

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

M
● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-65,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.72).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Edition: 2004 August AT-223 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

Cannot Be Changed to Manual Mode ACS00818

SYMPTOM:
Does not change to manual mode when manual shift gate is used.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH
Check the manual mode switch. Refer to AT-171, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS

Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-104, "TCM SELF-DIAG-
NOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" .
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic results?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-
106, "Judgement Self-Diagnosis Code" .
NO >> INSPECTION END
A/T Does Not Shift: 5th Gear → 4th Gear ACS00819

SYMPTOM:
When shifted from 5M to 4M position in manual mode, does not downshift from 5th to 4th gear.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-104, "TCM SELF-DIAG-
NOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" .
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic results?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-
106, "Judgement Self-Diagnosis Code" .
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL

Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Refill ATF.

SAT638A

Edition: 2004 August AT-224 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

3. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE A

Check the control linkage.
● Refer to AT-236, "Checking of A/T Position" .
OK or NG B
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-236, "Adjustment of
A/T Position" . AT

D
SCIA2119E

4. CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH E

Check the manual mode switch. Refer to AT-171, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" .
OK or NG
F
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION G

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition H
Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. I
NG >> GO TO 9.

SCIA5199E K

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

L
● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-65,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.14).
OK or NG
M
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

7. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. Refer to AT-61, "Cruise Test - Part 3" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 8.

Edition: 2004 August AT-225 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

8. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-90, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness
connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-65,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.14).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
A/T Does Not Shift: 4th Gear → 3rd Gear ACS0081A

SYMPTOM:
When shifted from 4M to 3M position in manual mode, does not downshift from 4th to 3rd gear.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-104, "TCM SELF-DIAG-
NOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" .
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic results?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-
106, "Judgement Self-Diagnosis Code" .
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL

Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Refill ATF.

SAT638A

3. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE

Check the control linkage.
● Refer to AT-236, "Checking of A/T Position" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-236, "Adjustment of
A/T Position" .

SCIA2119E

Edition: 2004 August AT-226 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

4. CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH A

Check the manual mode switch. Refer to AT-171, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. B
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION AT

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
D
Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. E
NG >> GO TO 9.

SCIA5199E
G
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-65, H
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.15).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. I
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

7. CHECK SYMPTOM J
Check again. Refer to AT-61, "Cruise Test - Part 3" .
OK or NG
K
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 8.

8. CHECK TCM L

1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-90, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness M
connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-65,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.15).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Edition: 2004 August AT-227 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd Gear → 2nd Gear ACS0081B

SYMPTOM:
When shifted from 3M to 2M position in manual mode, does not downshift from 3rd to 2nd gear.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-104, "TCM SELF-DIAG-
NOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" .
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic results?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-
106, "Judgement Self-Diagnosis Code" .
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL

Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Refill ATF.

SAT638A

3. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE

Check the control linkage.
● Refer to AT-236, "Checking of A/T Position" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-236, "Adjustment of
A/T Position" .

SCIA2119E

4. CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH

Check the manual mode switch. Refer to AT-171, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Edition: 2004 August AT-228 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION A

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" . B
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 9. AT

SCIA5199E
E
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-65,
F
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.16).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. G
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

7. CHECK SYMPTOM
H
Check again. Refer to AT-61, "Cruise Test - Part 3" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END I
NG >> GO TO 8.

8. CHECK TCM J
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-90, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness
connector. K
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. L

9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

M
● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-65,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.16).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Edition: 2004 August AT-229 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd Gear → 1st Gear ACS0081C

SYMPTOM:
When shifted from 2M to 1M position in manual mode, does not downshift from 2nd to 1st gear.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-104, "TCM SELF-DIAG-
NOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" .
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic results?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-
106, "Judgement Self-Diagnosis Code" .
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL

Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Refill ATF.

SAT638A

3. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE

Check the control linkage.
● Refer to AT-236, "Checking of A/T Position" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-236, "Adjustment of
A/T Position" .

SCIA2119E

4. CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH

Check the manual mode switch. Refer to AT-171, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Edition: 2004 August AT-230 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION A

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" . B
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 9. AT

SCIA5199E
E
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-65,
F
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.17).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. G
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

7. CHECK SYMPTOM
H
Check again. Refer to AT-61, "Cruise Test - Part 3" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END I
NG >> GO TO 8.

8. CHECK TCM J
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-90, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness
connector. K
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. L

9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

M
● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-65,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.17).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Edition: 2004 August AT-231 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake ACS0081D

SYMPTOM:
No engine brake is applied when the gear is shifted from the 2nd to 1st gear.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-104, "TCM SELF-DIAG-
NOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" .
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic results?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-94, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-
106, "Judgement Self-Diagnosis Code" .
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL

Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Refill ATF.

SAT638A

3. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE

Check the control linkage.
● Refer to AT-236, "Checking of A/T Position" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-236, "Adjustment of
A/T Position" .

SCIA2119E

4. CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH

Check the manual mode switch. Refer to AT-171, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Edition: 2004 August AT-232 2005 FX

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION A

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-244, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" . B
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 9. AT

SCIA5199E
E
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-65,
F
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.58).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. G
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

7. CHECK SYMPTOM
H
Check again. Refer to AT-61, "Cruise Test - Part 3" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END I
NG >> GO TO 8.

8. CHECK TCM J
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-90, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness
connector. K
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. L

9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

M
● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-65,
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.58).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Edition: 2004 August AT-233 2005 FX

 SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM

SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:34901

Control Device Removal and Installation ACS002RQ

SCIA4846E

1. Selector lever knob 2. Lock pin 3. Knob cover

4. A/T device harness connector 5. Shift lock solenoid and park position 6. Bracket
switch assembly
7. Control rod 8. Plain washer 9. Conical washer
10. Snap pin 11. Dust cover 12. Dust cover plate
13. Control device assembly 14. Position lamp 15. Position indicator plate

Edition: 2004 August AT-234 2005 FX

 SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM

REMOVAL
1. Disconnect lower lever of control device and control rod. A
2. Remove knob cover below selector lever knob downward.
3. Pull lock pin out of selector lever knob.
B
4. Remove selector lever knob.
5. Remove console finisher.
● Refer to IP-10, "Component Parts Drawing" .
AT
6. Remove center console.
● Refer to IP-10, "Component Parts Drawing" .

7. Remove key interlock cable from control device. D

● Refer to AT-242, "Removal and Installation" .
SCIA4954E

8. Disconnect A/T device harness connector.

9. Remove control device assembly. E

INSTALLATION
Install in reverse order of removal. Be careful of the following:
F
● After installation is completed, adjust and check A/T position.
Control Rod Removal and Installation ACS009AZ

CONTROL ROD COMPONENTS G

SCIA6589E M
1. Control device assembly 2. Transmission 3. Manual lever
4. Control rod 5. Lower lever

REMOVAL
1. Disconnect lower lever of control device and control rod.
2. Remove manual lever from transmission.
3. Remove control rod from vehicle.

SCIA5736E

Edition: 2004 August AT-235 2005 FX

 SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM

INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
● After installation is completed, adjust and check A/T position. Refer to AT-236, "Adjustment of A/T Posi-
tion" and AT-236, "Checking of A/T Position" .
Adjustment of A/T Position ACS002RR

1. Loosen nut of control rod.

2. Place PNP switch and selector lever in “P” position.
3. While pressing lower lever toward rear of vehicle (in “P” position
direction), tighten nut to specified torque.
CAUTION:
Do not push the bracket.
: 26 N·m (2.7 kg-m, 19 ft-lb)

SCIA2119E

Checking of A/T Position ACS002RS

1. Place selector lever in “P” position, and turn ignition switch ON (Do not start engine).
2. Check selector lever can be shifted to other than “P” position when brake pedal is depressed. Also check
selector lever can be shifted from “P” position only when brake pedal is depressed.
3. Move the selector lever and check for excessive effort, sticking, noise or rattle.
4. Check the selector lever stops at each position with the feel of engagement when it is moved through all
the positions. Check whether or not the actual position the selector lever is in matches the position shown
by the shift position indicator and the transmission body.
5. The method of operating the lever to individual positions cor-
rectly should be as shown in the figure.
6. When selector button is pressed in “P”, “R”, or “N” position with-
out applying forward/backward force to selector lever, check but-
ton operation for sticking.
7. Check the back-up lamps illuminate only when lever is placed in
the “R” position. Check the back-up lamps does not illuminate
when selector lever is pushed against “R” position in the “P” or
“N” position.
8. Check the engine can only be started with the selector lever in
the “P” and “N” positions. SCIA3906E

9. Check transmission is locked completely in “P” position.

10. When selector lever is set to manual shift gate, check manual mode is displayed on combination meter.
Shift selector lever to “+” and “-” sides, and check set shift position changes.

Edition: 2004 August AT-236 2005 FX

 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM

A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM PFP:34950

A
Description ACS002RT

● The mechanical key interlock mechanism also operates as a shift lock:

With the ignition switch turned to ON, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” position to any other B
position unless the brake pedal is depressed.
With the key removed, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” position to any other position.
The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is placed in “P” position.
AT
● The shift lock and key interlock mechanisms are controlled by the ON-OFF operation of the shift lock sole-
noid and by the operation of the rotator and slider located inside the key cylinder.
Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location ACS002RU D

SCIA2149E

Edition: 2004 August AT-237 2005 FX

 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM

Wiring Diagram — AT — SHIFT ACS002RV

TCWM0386E

Edition: 2004 August AT-238 2005 FX

 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002RW

A
SYMPTOM 1:
● Selector lever cannot be moved from “P” position with key in ON position and brake pedal
applied.
B
● Selector lever can be moved from “P” position with key in ON position and brake pedal released.
● Selector lever can be moved from “P” position when key is removed from key cylinder.
SYMPTOM 2: AT
● Ignition key cannot be removed when selector lever is set to “P” position.
● Ignition key can be removed when selector lever is set to any position except “P” position.
D

1. CHECK KEY INTERLOCK CABLE

Check the key interlock cable for damage. E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace key interlock cable. Refer to AT-241, "KEY INTERLOCK CABLE" . F

2. CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION

G
Check the selector lever position for damage. Refer to AT-236, "Checking of A/T Position"
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. H
NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-236, "Adjustment of A/T Position" .

3. CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID AND PARK POSITION SWITCH I

1. Connect A/T device harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Selector lever is set in P position. J
4. Check operation sound.
Condition Brake pedal Operation sound K
When ignition switch is turned to Depressed Yes
ON and selector lever is set in
“P” position. Released No
L
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 4. M

4. CHECK POWER SOURCE

1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Check the voltage between A/T device harness connector termi-
nal 1 and ground. Refer to AT-238, "Wiring Diagram — AT —
SHIFT" .
Condition Brake pedal Data (Approx.)

When ignition switch is turned to Depressed Battery voltage

ON. Released 0V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 5. SCIA2122E

Edition: 2004 August AT-239 2005 FX

 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM

5. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
3. Check continuity between stop lamp switch harness connector
terminals.
Condition Continuity
When brake pedal is depressed Yes
When brake pedal is released No

Check stop lamp switch after adjusting brake pedal — refer to

BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. SCIA2126E

NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check the following items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and stop lamp switch harness terminal 3.
● Harness for short or open between stop lamp switch harness terminal 4 and A/T device harness terminal
1.
● 10A fuse [No.12, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
● Ignition switch, Refer to PG-3, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

7. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T device harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T device harness connector termi-
nal 2 and ground.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace shift lock solenoid and park position switch
assembly.
NG >> Repair open circuit in harness or connectors.

SCIA2125E

Edition: 2004 August AT-240 2005 FX

 KEY INTERLOCK CABLE

KEY INTERLOCK CABLE PFP:34908

A
Components ACS002RX

AT

SCIA2150E
M
CAUTION:
● Install key interlock cable in such a way that it will not be damaged by sharp bends, twists or inter-
ference with adjacent parts.
● After installing key interlock cable to control device, make sure that casing cap and bracket are
firmly secured in their positions. If casing cap be removed with an external load of less than 39.2 N
(4.0 kg, 8.8 lb), replace key interlock cable with new one.

Edition: 2004 August AT-241 2005 FX

 KEY INTERLOCK CABLE

Removal and Installation ACS006H9

REMOVAL
1. Unlock slider by squeezing lock tabs on slider from adjuster
holder.
2. Remove casing cap from bracket of control device assembly
and remove interlock rod from adjuster holder.

SCIA1230E

3. Remove holder from key cylinder and remove key interlock

cable.

SCIA2258E

Edition: 2004 August AT-242 2005 FX

 KEY INTERLOCK CABLE

INSTALLATION
1. Set key interlock cable to key cylinder and install holder. A
2. Clamp key interlock cable and fix to key interlock cable with
band.
3. Turn ignition key to lock position. B
4. Set selector lever to P position.

AT

SCIA2258E

H
5. Insert interlock rod into adjuster holder.
6. Install casing cap to bracket.
7. Move slider in order to fix adjuster holder to interlock rod. I

K
SCIA1232E

Edition: 2004 August AT-243 2005 FX

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE PFP:00000

Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 ACS0081E

COMPONENTS

SCIA5478E

1. Transmission 2. Snap ring 3. Sub-harness

4. Control valve with TCM 5. Bracket 6. A/T fluid temperature sensor 2
7. Oil pan gasket 8. Oil pan 9. Magnet
10. Drain plug 11. Drain plug gasket 12. Oil pan mounting bolt
13. Terminal cord assembly 14. O-ring

CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM ASSEMBLY REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery cable from negative terminal.
2. Drain ATF through drain plug.
3. Remove front cross bar. Refer to FSU-8, "Components" .
4. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
5. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector.

Edition: 2004 August AT-244 2005 FX

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

6. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector.

A

AT

SCIA5021E

D
7. Push A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector. E

G
SCIA5022E

8. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. H

SCIA2308E
K
9. Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine causes of
malfunction. If the A/T fluid is very dark, smells burned, or con-
tains foreign particles, the frictional material (clutches, band) L
may need replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indi-
cates varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and
clutches to stick and can inhibit pump pressure. M
● If frictional material is detected, perform A/T fluid cooler
cleaning. Refer to AT-15, "A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning" .

SCIA5199E

10. Remove magnets from oil pan.

SCIA5200E

Edition: 2004 August AT-245 2005 FX

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

11. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector.

SCIA5023E

12. Straighten terminal clips to free terminal cord assembly and A/T
fluid temperature sensor 2 harness.

SCIA5446E

13. Disconnect revolution sensor connector.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector.

SCIA5024E

14. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness.

SCIA3969E

15. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM.

Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts
A 42 (1.65) 5
B 55 (2.17) 6
C 40 (1.57) 1

SCIA5139E

Edition: 2004 August AT-246 2005 FX

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

16. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case.

CAUTION: A
When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and
manual plate height. Remove it vertically.
B

AT

SCIA5142E

D
17. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from con-
trol valve with TCM.
E

G
SCIA5301E

18. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. H

SCIA5264E
K
19. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector.

SCIA5155E

20. Disconnect TCM connectors.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connectors.

SCIA5447E

Edition: 2004 August AT-247 2005 FX

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

21. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve

with TCM using a flat-bladed screwdriver.

SCIA5448E

22. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch

connector.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connectors.

SCIA5449E

Installation
CAUTION:
After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Changing A/T
Fluid" , AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch con-
nector.

SCIA5449E

2. Install A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with

TCM.

SCIA5450E

Edition: 2004 August AT-248 2005 FX

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

3. Connect TCM connectors.

A

AT

SCIA5447E

D
4. Install O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse O-ring. E
● Apply ATF to O-ring.

G
SCIA5155E

5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. H

SCIA5264E
K
6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control
valve with TCM.
CAUTION: L
Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with
TCM.
: 7.9 N·m (0.81 kg-m, 70 in-lb) M

SCIA5301E

7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case.

CAUTION:
● Make sure that turbine revolution sensor securely installs
turbine revolution sensor hole.
● Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so
as not to disturb installation of control valve with TCM.
● Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve
with TCM to terminal hole of transmission case.

SCIA5034E

Edition: 2004 August AT-249 2005 FX

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

● Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with

manual plate projection.

SCIA5142E

8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM.

Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts
A 42 (1.65) 5
B 55 (2.17) 6
C 40 (1.57) 1

SCIA5139E

9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. After

that tighten them in order (1 → 2 → 3), and then tighten other
bolts.
: 7.9 N·m (0.81 kg-m, 70 in-lb)

SCIA5140E

10. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.

SCIA5023E

11. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid tempera-
ture sensor 2 harness with terminal clips.

SCIA5446E

Edition: 2004 August AT-250 2005 FX

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

12. Connect revolution sensor connector.

A

AT

SCIA5024E
D
13. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips.

G
SCIA3969E

14. Install magnets in oil pan. H

SCIA5200E K

15. Install oil pan to transmission case.

a. Install oil pan gasket to oil pan. L
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse oil pan gasket.

● Install it in the direction to align hole positions.

M
● Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc. from oil pan gasket mounting surface.

b. Install oil pan (with oil pan gasket) to transmission case.

CAUTION:
● Install it so that drain plug comes to the position as
shown in the figure.
● Be careful not to pinch harnesses.

● Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc.

from oil pan mounting surface.

SCIA2308E

Edition: 2004 August AT-251 2005 FX

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

c. Tighten oil pan mounting bolts to the specified torque in numeri-

cal order shown in the figure after temporarily tightening them.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse oil pan mounting bolts.
: 7.9 N·m (0.81 kg-m, 70 in-lb)

16. Install drain plug to oil pan.

CAUTION:
Do not reuse drain plug gasket.
SCIA2492E
: 34 N·m (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb)

17. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector.

SCIA5038E

18. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector.

19. Connect A/T assembly harness connector.
20. Connect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
21. Install front cross bar. Refer to FSU-8, "Components" .
22. Pour ATF into transmission assembly. Refer to AT-12, "Chang-
ing A/T Fluid" .
23. Connect the battery cable to the negative terminal.

SCIA5039E

A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery cable from negative terminal.
2. Remove front cross bar. Refer to FSU-8, "Components" .
3. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
4. Drain ATF through drain plug.
5. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket.

SCIA2308E

Edition: 2004 August AT-252 2005 FX

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

6. Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine causes of

malfunction. If the A/T fluid is very dark, smells burned, or con- A
tains foreign particles, the frictional material (clutches, band)
may need replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indi-
cates varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and
B
clutches to stick and can inhibit pump pressure.
● If frictional material is detected, perform A/T fluid cooler
cleaning. Refer to AT-15, "A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning" .
AT

SCIA5199E

D
7. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector. E

G
SCIA5023E

8. Straighten terminal clip to free A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 H

harness.

SCIA5146E
K
9. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from con-
trol valve with TCM.
L

SCIA5302E

10. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.

SCIA5264E

Edition: 2004 August AT-253 2005 FX

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

Installation
1. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.

SCIA5264E

2. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control

valve with TCM.
: 7.9 N·m (0.81 kg-m, 70 in-lb)

SCIA5302E

3. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.

SCIA5023E

4. Securely fasten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with ter-

minal clip.

SCIA5146E

5. Install oil pan to transmission case.

a. Install oil pan gasket to oil pan.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse oil pan gasket.

● Install it in the direction to align hole positions.

● Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc. from oil pan mounting surface.

Edition: 2004 August AT-254 2005 FX

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

b. Install oil pan (with oil pan gasket) to transmission case.

CAUTION: A
● Install it so that drain plug comes to the position as
shown in the figure.
● Be careful not to pinch harnesses. B
● Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc.
from oil pan mounting surface.
AT

SCIA2308E

D
c. Tighten oil pan mounting bolts to the specified torque in numeri-
cal order shown in the figure after temporarily tightening them.
CAUTION: E
Do not reuse oil pan mounting bolts.
: 7.9 N·m (0.81 kg-m, 70 in-lb)
F
6. Install drain plug to oil pan.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse drain plug gasket. G
SCIA2492E
: 34 N·m (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb)

7. Connect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. H

8. Install front cross bar. Refer to FSU-8, "Components" .
9. Pour ATF into transmission assembly. Refer to AT-12, "Changing A/T Fluid" .
10. Connect the battery cable to the negative terminal. I

Edition: 2004 August AT-255 2005 FX

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

Parking Components (2WD Models Only) ACS0081F

COMPONENTS

SCIA5216E

1. Rear oil seal 2. Rear extension 3. Parking actuator support

4. Parking pawl 5. Return spring 6. Pawl shaft
7. Self-sealing bolt 8. Seal ring 9. Parking gear
10. Output shaft 11. Bearing race 12. Needle bearing

REMOVAL
1. Drain ATF through drain plug.
2. Remove exhaust front tube and center muffler with power tool. Refer to EX-3, "Removal and Installation" .
3. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to PR-9, "Removal and Installation" .
4. Remove control rod. Refer to AT-235, "Control Rod Removal and Installation" .
5. Support transmission assembly with a transmission jack.
CAUTION:
When setting transmission jack, be careful not to allow it to collide against the drain plug.
6. Remove engine rear member with power tool. Refer to AT-271, "Removal and Installation (2WD Models)"
.

Edition: 2004 August AT-256 2005 FX

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

7. Remove tightening bolts for rear extension assembly and trans-

mission case. A

AT

SCIA3426E

D
8. Tap rear extension assembly with soft hammer.

G
SCIA3432E

9. Remove rear extension assembly from transmission case. (With H

needle bearing.)

SCIA3431E
K
10. Remove bearing race from output shaft.

SCIA5245E

11. Remove output shaft from transmission case by rotating left/

right.

SCIA5246E

Edition: 2004 August AT-257 2005 FX

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

12. Remove parking gear from output shaft.

SCIA5247E

13. Remove seal rings from output shaft.

SCIA5209E

14. Remove needle bearing from rear extension.

15. Remove parking actuator support from rear extension.

SCIA3423E

16. Remove parking pawl (with return spring) and pawl shaft from
rear extension.

SCIA3424E

Edition: 2004 August AT-258 2005 FX

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

17. Remove return spring from parking pawl.

A

AT

SCIA2445E

D
18. Remove rear oil seal from rear extension.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch rear extension. E

G
SCIA3524E

INSPECTION
H
● If the contact surface on parking actuator support, parking pawl,
etc. has excessive wear, abrasion, bend, or any other damage,
replace the components.
I

K
SCIA5143E

SCIA5144E

Edition: 2004 August AT-259 2005 FX

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

INSTALLATION
1. As shown in the right figure illustration, use a drift to drive rear
oil seal into the rear extension until it is flush.
CAUTION:
● Apply ATF to rear oil seal.

● Do not reuse rear oil seal.

SCIA5311E

2. Install return spring to parking pawl.

SCIA2445E

3. Install parking pawl (with return spring) and pawl shaft to rear
extension.

SCIA3424E

4. Install parking actuator support to rear extension.

5. Install needle bearing to rear extension.
CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.

SCIA3423E

Edition: 2004 August AT-260 2005 FX

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

6. Install seal rings in output shaft.

CAUTION: A
● Do not reuse seal rings.

● Apply petroleum jelly to seal rings.

B

AT

SCIA5209E

D
7. Install parking gear to output shaft

G
SCIA5247E

8. Install output shaft to transmission case. H

SCIA5246E
K
9. Install bearing race to output shaft.

SCIA5245E

10. Apply recommended sealant (Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket

or equivalent. Refer to GI-49, "Recommended Chemical Prod-
ucts and Sealants" .) to rear extension assembly as shown in
the figure.
CAUTION:
Completely remove all moisture, oil and old sealant, etc.
from the transmission case and rear extension assembly
mounting surfaces.

SCIA5212E

Edition: 2004 August AT-261 2005 FX

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

11. Install rear extension assembly to transmission case. (With nee-

dle bearing.)
CAUTION:
Insert the tip of parking rod between the parking pawl and
the parking actuator support when assembling the rear
extension assembly.

SCIA3431E

12. Tighten rear extension assembly mounting bolts to specified

torque.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse self-sealing bolt.
Rear extension assembly mounting bolt
: 52 N·m (5.3 Kg-m, 38 ft-lb)
Self-sealing bolt
: 61 N·m (6.2 Kg-m, 45 ft-lb)
SCIA3426E

13. Install engine rear member. Refer to AT-271, "Removal and Installation (2WD Models)" .
14. Install control rod. Refer to AT-235, "Control Rod Removal and Installation" .
15. Install rear propeller shaft. Refer to PR-9, "Removal and Installation" .
16. Install exhaust front tube and center muffler. Refer to EX-3, "Removal and Installation" .
17. Install drain plug in oil pan.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse drain plug gasket.
: 34 N·m (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb)

18. Pour ATF into transmission assembly. Refer to AT-12, "Changing A/T Fluid" .

Edition: 2004 August AT-262 2005 FX

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

Rear Oil Seal ACS0081G

REMOVAL A
1. Remove center muffler with power tool. Refer to EX-3, "Removal
and Installation" .
2. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to PR-9, "Removal and B
Installation" .
3. Remove transfer assembly from transmission assembly (AWD
models). Refer to TF-45, "Removal and Installation" . AT
4. Remove rear oil seal using a flat-bladed screwdriver.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch rear extension assembly (2WD D
models) or adapter case assembly (AWD models).

SCIA5410E
H

INSTALLATION
CAUTION: I
After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Changing A/T
Fluid" , AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
1. As shown in the right figure, use the drift to drive rear oil seal
J
into rear extension assembly (2WD models) or adapter case
assembly (AWD models) until it is flush.
CAUTION:
● Apply ATF to rear oil seal.
K
● Do not reuse rear oil seal.

2. Install transfer assembly to transmission assembly (AWD mod-

L
els). Refer to TF-45, "Removal and Installation" .
3. Install rear propeller shaft. Refer to PR-9, "Removal and Installa-
tion" .
M
4. Install center muffler. Refer to EX-3, "Removal and Installation" .

SCIA5411E

Edition: 2004 August AT-263 2005 FX

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

Revolution Sensor Components (2WD Models Only) ACS0081H

COMPONENTS

SCIA5145E

1. Rear extension 2. Transmission 3. Revolution sensor

4. Oil pan gasket 5. Oil pan 6. Oil pan mounting bolt
7. Drain plug gasket 8. Drain plug 9. Self-sealing bolt

REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery cable from negative terminal.
2. Drain ATF through drain plug.
3. Remove front cross bar. Refer to FSU-8, "Components" .
4. Remove exhaust front tube and center muffler with power tool. Refer to EX-3, "Removal and Installation" .
5. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to PR-9, "Removal and Installation" .
6. Remove control rod. Refer to AT-235, "Control Rod Removal and Installation" .
7. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket.

SCIA2308E

Edition: 2004 August AT-264 2005 FX

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

8. Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine causes of

malfunction. If the A/T fluid is very dark, smells burned, or con- A
tains foreign particles, the frictional material (clutches, band)
may need replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indi-
cates varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and
B
clutches to stick and can inhibit pump pressure.
● If frictional material is detected, perform A/T fluid cooler
cleaning. Refer to AT-15, "A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning" .
AT
9. Support transmission assembly with a transmission jack.
CAUTION:
When setting transmission jack, place wooden blocks to SCIA5199E

prevent from damaging control valve with TCM and trans- D

mission case.
10. Remove engine rear member with power tool. Refer to AT-271, "Removal and Installation (2WD Models)"
. E

11. Remove tightening bolts for rear extension assembly and trans-
mission case. F

SCIA3426E

I
12. Tap rear extension assembly with soft hammer.

L
SCIA3432E

13. Remove rear extension assembly from transmission case. (With

needle bearing.) M

SCIA3431E

Edition: 2004 August AT-265 2005 FX

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

14. Disconnect revolution sensor connector.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector
15. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness.

SCIA3969E

16. Remove revolution sensor from transmission case.

CAUTION:
● Do not subject it to impact by dropping or hitting it.

● Do not disassemble.

● Do not allow metal filings, etc., to get on the sensor's

front edge magnetic area.
● Do not place in an area affected by magnetism.

SCIA3997E

INSTALLATION
1. Install revolution sensor in transmission case.
CAUTION:
● Do not subject it to impact by dropping or hitting it.

● Do not disassemble.

● Do not allow metal filings, etc., to get on the sensor's

front edge magnetic area.
● Do not place in an area affected by magnetism.

: 5.8 N·m (0.59 kg-m, 51 in-lb)

SCIA3997E

2. Connect revolution sensor connector.

3. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with clips.

SCIA3969E

4. Apply recommended sealant (Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket

or equivalent. Refer to GI-49, "Recommended Chemical Prod-
ucts and Sealants" .) to rear extension assembly as shown in
illustration.
CAUTION:
Completely remove all moisture, oil and old sealant, etc.
from transmission case and rear extension assembly
mounting surfaces.

SCIA5212E

Edition: 2004 August AT-266 2005 FX

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

5. Install rear extension assembly to transmission case. (With nee-

dle bearing.) A
CAUTION:
Insert the tip of parking rod between the parking pole and
the parking actuator support when assembling the rear B
extension assembly.

AT

SCIA3431E
D
6. Tighten rear extension assembly mounting bolts to specified
torque.
CAUTION: E
Do not reuse self-sealing bolt.
Rear extension assembly mounting bolt
: 52 N·m (5.3 Kg-m, 38 ft-lb) F

Self-sealing bolt
: 61 N·m (6.2 Kg-m, 45 ft-lb) G
SCIA3426E

7. Install engine rear member. Refer to AT-271, "Removal and Installation (2WD Models)" .
H
8. Install oil pan to transmission case.
a. Install oil pan gasket to oil pan.
CAUTION: I
● Do not reuse oil pan gasket.

● Install it in the direction to align hole positions.

● Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc. from oil pan mounting surface. J
b. Install oil pan (with oil pan gasket) to transmission case.
CAUTION:
● Install it so that drain plug comes to the position as K
shown in the figure.
● Be careful not to pinch harnesses.

● Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc. L

from oil pan mounting surface.

M
SCIA2308E

c. Tighten oil pan mounting bolts to the specified torque in numeri-

cal order shown in the figure after temporarily tightening them.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse oil pan mounting bolts.
: 7.9 N·m (0.81 kg-m, 70 in-lb)

9. Install drain plug to oil pan.

CAUTION:
Do not reuse drain plug gasket.
SCIA2492E
: 34 N·m (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb)

10. Install control rod. Refer to AT-235, "Control Rod Removal and Installation" .
11. Install rear propeller shaft. Refer to PR-9, "Removal and Installation" .

Edition: 2004 August AT-267 2005 FX

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

12. Install exhaust front tube and center muffler. Refer to EX-3, "Removal and Installation" .
13. Install front cross bar. Refer to FSU-8, "Components" .
14. Pour ATF into transmission assembly. Refer to AT-12, "Changing A/T Fluid" .
15. Connect the battery cable to the negative terminal.

Edition: 2004 August AT-268 2005 FX

 AIR BREATHER HOSE

AIR BREATHER HOSE PFP:31098

A
Removal and Installation ACS002S0

VQ35DE ENGINE MODEL

Refer to the figure below for air breather hose removal and installation procedure. B

AT

J
SCIA2151E

CAUTION:
● When installing an air breather hose, be careful not to be crushed or blocked by folding or bend- K
ing the hose.
● When inserting a hose to the transmission tube, be sure to insert it fully until its end reaches the
tube bend R portion.
L

Edition: 2004 August AT-269 2005 FX

 AIR BREATHER HOSE

VK45DE ENGINE MODEL

Refer to the figure below for air breather hose removal and installation procedure.

SCIA2152E

CAUTION:
● When installing an air breather hose, be careful not to be crushed or blocked by folding or bend-
ing the hose.
● When inserting a hose to the transmission tube, be sure to insert it fully until its end reaches the
tube bend R portion.

Edition: 2004 August AT-270 2005 FX

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY

TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY PFP:31020

A
Removal and Installation (2WD Models) ACS002S1

COMPONENTS
B

AT

SCIA6379E
K
1. A/T fluid charging pipe 2. O-ring 3. Insulator
4. Rear member 5. Copper washer 6. Fluid cooler tube
L
7. Bracket 8. Transmission assembly 9. A/T fluid level gauge

REMOVAL
CAUTION: M
When removing the transmission assembly from engine, first remove the crankshaft position sensor
(POS) from the transmission assembly.
Be careful not to damage sensor edge.
1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
2. Remove engine cover.
3. Remove A/T fluid level gauge.
4. Remove engine under cover with power tool.
5. Remove front cross bar. Refer to FSU-8, "Components"
6. Remove exhaust front tube and center muffler with power tool. Refer to EX-3, "Removal and Installation" .
7. Remove three way catalyst. Refer to EM-26, "Removal and Installation" .
8. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to PR-9, "Removal and Installation" .
9. Remove control rod. Refer to AT-235, "Control Rod Removal and Installation" .

Edition: 2004 August AT-271 2005 FX

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY

10. Remove crankshaft position sensor (POS) from transmission

assembly.
CAUTION:
● Do not subject it to impact by dropping or hitting it.

● Do not disassemble.

● Do not allow metal filings, etc. to get on the sensor's front

edge magnetic area.
● Do not place in an area affected by magnetism.

11. Remove starter motor. Refer to SC-18, "VQ35DE ENGINE

MODELS (2WD)" . SCIA2155E

12. Remove fluid cooler tube.

13. Remove rear plate cover. Refer to EM-30, "Removal and Installation (2WD Model)" .
14. Remove rear cover plate. Refer to EM-30, "Removal and Installation (2WD Model)" .
15. Turn crankshaft, and remove the four tightening bolts for drive
plate and torque converter.
CAUTION:
When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from
the front of the engine.
16. Support transmission assembly with a transmission jack.
CAUTION:
When setting the transmission jack, be careful not to allow
it to collide against the drain plug.
17. Remove engine rear member with power tool. SCIA2288E
18. Remove air breather hose. Refer to AT-269, "Removal and
Installation" .
19. Disconnect A/T assembly connector.
20. Remove A/T fluid charging pipe from transmission assembly.
21. Plug up openings such as the fluid charging pipe hole, etc.
22. Remove bolts fixing transmission assembly to engine assembly with power tool.
23. Remove transmission assembly from vehicle with a transmis-
sion jack.
● Secure torque converter to prevent it from dropping.

● Secure transmission assembly to a transmission jack.

SCIA0499E

INSPECTION
Installation and Inspection of Torque Converter
● After inserting a torque converter to a transmission, be sure to
check distance “A” to ensure it is within the reference value limit.
Distance “A”: 25.0 mm (0.98 in) or more

SAT017B

Edition: 2004 August AT-272 2005 FX

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY

INSTALLATION
Install the removed parts in the reverse order of the removal, while paying attention to the following work. A
● When installing transmission assembly to the engine assembly,
attach the fixing bolts in accordance with the following standard.
B
Bolt No. 1 2 3 4
Number of bolts 1 5 2 2
Bolt length AT
55 (2.17) 65 (2.56) 65 (2.56) 35 (1.38)
“ ”mm (in)
Tightening torque 75 55 47
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) (7.7, 55) (5.6, 41) (4.8, 35) D
SCIA3949E

● Align the positions of tightening bolts for drive plate with those of E
the torque converter, and temporarily tighten the bolts. Then,
tighten the bolts with the specified torque. Refer to AT-271,
"COMPONENTS" . F
CAUTION:
● When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from
the front of the engine. G
● When tightening the tightening bolts for the torque con-
verter after fixing the crankshaft pulley bolts, be sure to
confirm the tightening torque of the crankshaft pulley
H
mounting bolts. SCIA2288E

● After converter is installed to drive plate, rotate crankshaft

several turns and check to be sure that transmission rotates freely without binding.
I
● Install crankshaft position sensor (POS). Refer to EM-30, "Removal and Installation (2WD Model)" .
● After completing installation, check fluid leakage, fluid level, and the A/T positions of A/T. Refer to AT-12,
"Changing A/T Fluid" , AT-236, "Adjustment of A/T Position" , AT-236, "Checking of A/T Position" .
J

Edition: 2004 August AT-273 2005 FX

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY

Removal and Installation (AWD Models) ACS0033A

COMPONENTS (FOR VQ35DE)

SCIA6425E

1. A/T fluid charging pipe 2. O-ring 3. Insulator

4. Rear member 5. Copper washer 6. Bracket
7. Fluid cooler tube 8. Bracket 9. Transmission assembly
10. A/T fluid level gauge

Edition: 2004 August AT-274 2005 FX

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY

COMPONENTS (FOR VK45DE)

A

AT

J
SCIA6426E

1. A/T fluid charging pipe 2. O-ring 3. Insulator

4. Rear member 5. Copper washer 6. Bracket K
7. Fluid cooler tube 8. Bracket 9. Bracket
10. Bracket 11. Transmission assembly 12. A/T fluid level gauge
L
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
When removing the transmission assembly from engine, first remove the crankshaft position sensor
(POS) from the transmission assembly. M
Be careful not to damage sensor edge.
1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
2. Remove engine cover.
3. Remove A/T fluid level gauge.
4. Remove engine under cover with power tool.
5. Remove front cross bar. Refer to FSU-8, "Components" .
6. Remove exhaust front tube and center muffler with power tool. Refer to EX-3, "Removal and Installation" .
7. Remove three way catalyst. Refer to EM-182, "Removal and Installation" .
8. Remove front propeller shaft. Refer to PR-5, "Removal and Installation" .
9. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to PR-9, "Removal and Installation" .
10. Remove control rod. Refer to AT-235, "Control Rod Removal and Installation" .

Edition: 2004 August AT-275 2005 FX

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY

11. Remove crankshaft position sensor (POS) from transmission

assembly.
CAUTION:
● Do not subject it to impact by dropping or hitting it.

● Do not disassemble.

● Do not allow metal filings, etc., to get on the sensor's

front edge magnetic area.
● Do not place in an area affected by magnetism.

12. Remove starter motor. Refer to SC-19, "VQ35DE ENGINE

MODELS (AWD)" or SC-17, "VK45DE ENGINE MODELS" . SCIA2011E

13. Disconnect fluid cooler tube from transmission assembly.

14. Remove rear plate cover. Refer to EM-36, "Removal and Instal-
lation (AWD Model)" (for VQ35DE models) or EM-185,
"Removal and Installation" (for VK45DE models).

SCIA5326E

15. Turn crankshaft, and remove the four tightening bolts for drive
plate and torque converter.
CAUTION:
When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from
the front of the engine.

SCIA2010E

16. Remove dynamic damper (for VQ35DE models). Refer to EM-

117, "Removal and Installation (AWD Model)" .
17. Support transmission assembly with a transmission jack.
CAUTION:
When setting the transmission jack, be careful not to allow
it to collide against the drain plug.
18. Remove engine rear member with power tool.
19. Tilt the mission slightly to keep the clearance between body and
mission, and then disconnect air breather hose from charging
pipe. Refer to AT-269, "Removal and Installation" . SCIA2202E
20. Disconnect A/T assembly connector and transfer assembly con-
nector.
21. Remove A/T fluid charging pipe.
22. Plug up openings such as the fluid charging pipe hole, etc.
23. Remove bolts fixing transmission assembly to engine with power tool.

Edition: 2004 August AT-276 2005 FX

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY

24. Remove transmission assembly with transfer from vehicle.

● Secure torque converter to prevent it from dropping. A
● Secure transmission assembly to a jack.

25. Remove transfer from transmission assembly. Refer to TF-45,

"Removal and Installation" . B

AT

SCIA2203E

D
INSPECTION
Installation and Inspection of Torque Converter
● After inserting a torque converter to a transmission, be sure to E
check distance “A” to ensure it is within the reference value limit.
Distance “A”
VQ35DE models: 25.0 mm (0.98 in) or more F
VK45DE models: 22.0 mm (0.87 in) or more

SAT017B H
INSTALLATION
Install the removed parts in the reverse order of the removal, while paying attention to the following work.
● When installing transmission assembly to the engine assembly, attach the fixing bolts in accordance with I
the following standard.
For VQ35DE models
J
Bolt No. 1 2 3 4
Number of bolts 1 5 2 1
Bolt length K
55 (2.17) 65 (2.56) 35 (1.38) 40 (1.57)
“ ”mm (in)
Tightening torque 75 47 34
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) (7.7, 55) (4.8, 35) (3.5, 25) L

SCIA4600E M

For VK45DE models

Bolt No. 1 2* 3
Number of bolts 5 1 4
Bolt length
70 (2.76) 70 (2.76) 65 (2.56)
“ ”mm (in)
Tightening torque 113 74.0
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) (12, 83) (7.5, 55)
*: No.2 bolt also secures A/T fluid charging pipe.
SCIA4601E

Edition: 2004 August AT-277 2005 FX

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY

● Align the positions of tightening bolts for drive plate with those of
the torque converter, and temporarily tighten the bolts. Then,
tighten the bolts with the specified torque. Refer to AT-274,
"COMPONENTS (FOR VQ35DE)" or AT-275, "COMPONENTS
(FOR VK45DE)" .
CAUTION:
● When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from
the front of the engine.
● When tightening the tightening bolts for the torque con-
verter after fixing the crankshaft pulley bolts, be sure to
confirm the tightening torque of the crankshaft pulley SCIA2010E

mounting bolts.
● After converter is installed to drive plate, rotate crankshaft several turns and check to be sure that
transmission rotates freely without binding.
● Install crankshaft position sensor (POS). Refer to EM-30, "Removal and Installation (2WD Model)" , EM-
185, "Removal and Installation" .
● After completing installation, check fluid leakage, fluid level, and the positions of A/T. Refer to AT-12,
"Changing A/T Fluid" , AT-236, "Adjustment of A/T Position" , AT-236, "Checking of A/T Position" .

Edition: 2004 August AT-278 2005 FX

 OVERHAUL

OVERHAUL PFP:00000
A
Components ACS0081I

AT

SCIA5422E

Edition: 2004 August AT-279 2005 FX

 OVERHAUL

1. O-ring 2. Oil pump cover 3. O-ring

4. Oil pump housing 5. Self-sealing bolt 6. Torque converter
7. Converter housing 8. Oil pump housing oil seal 9. Bearing race
10. Needle bearing 11. O-ring 12. Front carrier assembly
13. Snap ring 14. Front sun gear 15. 3rd one-way clutch
16. Snap ring 17. Bearing race 18. Needle bearing
19. Seal ring 20. Input clutch assembly 21. Needle bearing
22. Rear internal gear 23. Brake band 24. Mid carrier assembly
25. Needle bearing 26. Bearing race 27. Rear carrier assembly
28. Needle bearing 29. Mid sun gear 30. Seal ring
31. Rear sun gear 32. 1st one-way clutch 33. Snap ring
34. Needle bearing 35. High and low reverse clutch hub 36. Snap ring
37. Bearing race 38. Needle bearing

Edition: 2004 August AT-280 2005 FX

 OVERHAUL

AT

SCIA5181E

1. Bearing race 2. High and low reverse clutch assem- 3. Needle bearing
bly
4. Direct clutch assembly 5. Needle bearing 6. Reverse brake dish plate

Edition: 2004 August AT-281 2005 FX

 OVERHAUL

7. Reverse brake driven plate 8. N-sprig 9. Snap ring

10. Reverse brake retaining plate 11. Reverse brake drive plate 12. Snap ring
13. Spring retainer 14. Return spring 15. Reverse brake piston
16. D-ring 17. D-ring

Edition: 2004 August AT-282 2005 FX

 OVERHAUL

2WD models
A

AT

SCIA6499E

1. Rear oil seal 2. Self-sealing bolt 3. Rear extension

4. Parking actuator support 5. Return spring 6. Parking pawl

Edition: 2004 August AT-283 2005 FX

 OVERHAUL

7. Pawl shaft 8. Seal ring 9. Needle bearing

10. Revolution sensor 11. Parking gear 12. Output shaft
13. Bearing race 14. Needle bearing 15. Manual plate
16. Parking rod 17. Manual shaft oil seal 18. Manual shaft
19. O-ring 20. Band servo anchor end pin 21. Detent spring
22. Spacer 23. Seal ring 24. Snap ring
25. Return spring 26. O-ring 27. Servo assembly
28. Snap ring 29. Sub-harness 30. Control valve with TCM
31. Bracket 32. A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 33. Oil pan
34. Magnet 35. Drain plug 36. Drain plug gasket
37. Oil pan mounting bolt 38. Oil pan gasket 39. Terminal cord assembly
40. O-ring 41. Retaining pin 42. Transmission case

Edition: 2004 August AT-284 2005 FX

 OVERHAUL

AWD models
A

AT

SCIA6500E

1. Rear oil seal 2. Bracket 3. Adapter case

4. Parking actuator support 5. Return spring 6. Parking pawl

Edition: 2004 August AT-285 2005 FX

 OVERHAUL

7. Pawl shaft 8. Self-sealing bolt 9. Seal ring

10. Needle bearing 11. Gasket 12. Revolution sensor
13. Parking gear 14. Output shaft 15. Bearing race
16. Needle bearing 17. Manual plate 18. Parking rod
19. Manual shaft oil seal 20. Manual shaft 21. O-ring
22. Band servo anchor end pin 23. Detent spring 24. Spacer
25. Seal ring 26. Snap ring 27. Return spring
28. O-ring 29. Servo assembly 30. Snap ring
31. Sub-harness 32. Control valve with TCM 33. Bracket
34. A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 35. Oil pan 36. Magnet
37. Drain plug 38. Drain plug gasket 39. Oil pan mounting bolt
40. Oil pan gasket 41. Terminal cord assembly 42. O-ring
43. Retaining pin 44. Transmission case

Edition: 2004 August AT-286 2005 FX

 OVERHAUL

Oil Channel ACS0081J

A
2WD models

AT

SCIA6387E

Edition: 2004 August AT-287 2005 FX

 OVERHAUL

AWD models

SCIA6487E

Edition: 2004 August AT-288 2005 FX

 OVERHAUL

Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap

Rings ACS0081K
A

2WD models
B

AT

SCIA6535E

Edition: 2004 August AT-289 2005 FX

 OVERHAUL

AWD models

SCIA6488E

Edition: 2004 August AT-290 2005 FX

 DISASSEMBLY

DISASSEMBLY PFP:31020
A
Disassembly ACS0081L

CAUTION:
Do not disassemble parts behind Drum Support. Refer to AT-18, "Cross-Sectional View (2WD Models)" B
or AT-19, "Cross-Sectional View (AWD Models)" .
1. Drain ATF through drain plug.
2. Remove torque converter by holding it firmly and turing while AT
pulling straight out.

SCIA5010E F

3. Check torque converter one-way clutch using check tool as

shown in the figure.
G
a. Insert check tool into the groove of bearing support built into
one-way clutch outer race.
b. When fixing bearing support with check tool, rotate one-way H
clutch spline using screwdriver.
c. Make sure that inner race rotates clockwise only. If not, replace
torque converter assembly.
I

SCIA3171E
M

4. Remove converter housing from transmission case.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch converter housing.

SCIA3427E

Edition: 2004 August AT-291 2005 FX

 DISASSEMBLY

5. Remove O-ring from input clutch assembly.

SCIA5011E

6. Remove tightening bolts for oil pump assembly and transmis-

sion case.

SCIA2300E

7. Attach the sliding hammers to oil pump assembly and extract it

evenly from transmission case.
CAUTION:
● Fully tighten sliding hammer screw.

● Make sure that bearing race is installed to the oil pump

assembly edge surface.

SCIA5474E

8. Remove O-ring from oil pump assembly.

SCIA5172E

Edition: 2004 August AT-292 2005 FX

 DISASSEMBLY

9. Remove bearing race from oil pump assembly.

A

AT

SCIA5252E

D
10. Remove needle bearing from front sun gear.

G
SCIA2808E

11. Remove front sun gear assembly from front carrier assembly. H
NOTE:
Remove front sun gear by rotating left/right.
I

SCIA5014E
K
12. Remove seal rings from input clutch assembly.

SCIA2470E

13. Remove front carrier assembly from rear carrier assembly. (With
input clutch assembly and rear internal gear.)
CAUTION:
Be careful to remove it with needle bearing.

SCIA5015E

Edition: 2004 August AT-293 2005 FX

 DISASSEMBLY

14. Loosen lock nut and remove band servo anchor end pin from
transmission case.

SCIA6512E

15. Remove brake band from transmission case.

SCIA2580E

● To prevent brake linings from cracking or peeling, do not

stretch the flexible band unnecessarily. When removing
the brake band, always secure it with a clip as shown in
the figure at right.
Leave the clip in position after removing the brake band.
● Check brake band facing for damage, cracks, wear or
burns.

SAT655

16. Remove mid carrier assembly and rear carrier assembly as a

unit.

SCIA5017E

17. Remove mid carrier assembly from rear carrier assembly.

SCIA5697E

Edition: 2004 August AT-294 2005 FX

 DISASSEMBLY

18. Remove needle bearing (front side) from mid carrier assembly.
A

AT

SCIA2805E
D
19. Remove needle bearing (rear side) from mid carrier assembly.

G
SCIA2804E

20. Remove bearing race from rear carrier assembly. H

SCIA5175E K

21. Remove needle bearing from rear carrier assembly.

L

SCIA2803E

22. Remove mid sun gear assembly, rear sun gear assembly and
high and low reverse clutch hub as a unit.
CAUTION:
Be careful to remove then with bearing race and needle
bearing.

SCIA5018E

Edition: 2004 August AT-295 2005 FX

 DISASSEMBLY

23. Remove high and low reverse clutch assembly from direct clutch
assembly.
CAUTION:
Make sure that needle bearing is installed to the high and
low reverse clutch assembly edge surface.

SCIA2306E

24. Remove direct clutch assembly from reverse brake.

SCIA5019E

25. Remove needle bearing from drum support.

SCIA5198E

26. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector.

SCIA5021E

27. Push A/T assembly harness connector.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector.

SCIA5022E

Edition: 2004 August AT-296 2005 FX

 DISASSEMBLY

28. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket.

A

AT

SCIA2308E
D
29. Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine causes of
malfunction. If the A/T fluid is very dark, smells burned, or con-
tains foreign particles, the frictional material (clutches, band) E
may need replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indi-
cates varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and
clutches to stick and can inhibit pump pressure.
F
● If frictional material is detected, perform A/T fluid cooler
cleaning. Refer to AT-15, "A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning" .

G
SCIA5199E

30. Remove magnets from oil pan. H

SCIA5200E K

31. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.

CAUTION: L
Be careful not to damage connector.

SCIA5023E

32. Straighten terminal clips to free terminal cord assembly and A/T
fluid temperature sensor 2 harness.

SCIA5446E

Edition: 2004 August AT-297 2005 FX

 DISASSEMBLY

33. Disconnect revolution sensor connector.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector.

SCIA5024E

34. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness.

SCIA5293E

35. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM.

Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts
A 42 (1.65) 5
B 55 (2.17) 6
C 40 (1.57) 1

SCIA5025E

36. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case.

CAUTION:
When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and
manual plate [Link] it vertically.

SCIA5260E

37. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from con-
trol valve with TCM.

SCIA5301E

Edition: 2004 August AT-298 2005 FX

 DISASSEMBLY

38. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.

A

AT

SCIA5264E
D
39. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector.

G
SCIA5155E

40. Disconnect TCM connectors. H

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connectors.
I

SCIA5447E K

41. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve

with TCM using a flat-bladed screwdriver.
L

SCIA5448E

42. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch

connector.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connectors.

SCIA5449E

Edition: 2004 August AT-299 2005 FX

 DISASSEMBLY

43. Remove rear extension assembly (2WD models) or adapter case assembly (AWD models) according to
the following procedures.
a. 2WD models
i. Remove tightening bolts for rear extension assembly and trans-
mission case.

SCIA3426E

ii. Tap rear extension assembly with soft hammer.

SCIA5028E

iii. Remove rear extension assembly from transmission case. (With

needle bearing.)

SCIA5029E

Edition: 2004 August AT-300 2005 FX

 DISASSEMBLY

b. AWD models
A
i. Remove tightening bolts for adapter case assembly and trans-
mission case. (With bracket)

AT

SCIA5182E

H
ii. Tap adapter case assembly with soft hammer.

K
SCIA5201E

iii. Remove adapter case assembly from transmission case. (With

needle bearing) L

SCIA5186E

Edition: 2004 August AT-301 2005 FX

 DISASSEMBLY

iv. Remove gasket from transmission case.

SCIA5231E

44. Remove bearing race from output shaft.

SCIA5245E

45. Remove output shaft from transmission case by rotating left/

right.

SCIA5030E

46. Remove parking gear from output shaft.

SCIA5247E

47. Remove seal rings from output shaft.

SCIA5209E

Edition: 2004 August AT-302 2005 FX

 DISASSEMBLY

48. Remove needle bearing from transmission case.

A

AT

SCIA5031E
D
49. Remove revolution sensor from transmission case.
CAUTION:
● Do not subject it to impact by dropping or hitting it. E
● Do not disassemble.

● Do not allow metal filings, etc. to get on the sensor's front

edge magnetic area. F
● Do not place in an area affected by magnetism.

G
SCIA2320E

50. Remove reverse brake snap ring (fixing plate) using 2 flat- H
bladed screwdrivers.
NOTE:
Press out snap ring from the transmission case oil pan side gap I
using a flat-bladed screwdriver, and remove it using another
screwdriver.
51. Remove reverse brake retaining plate from transmission case.
J
● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. If necessary,
replace the plate.
SCIA5032E K

52. Remove N-spring from transmission case.

L

SCIA5214E

53. Remove reverse brake drive plates, driven plates and dish plate
from transmission case.
● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. If necessary,
replace the plate.

SCIA2322E

Edition: 2004 August AT-303 2005 FX

 DISASSEMBLY

54. Remove snap ring (fixing spring retainer) using a flat-bladed

screwdriver.

SCIA2323E

55. Remove spring retainer and return spring from transmission

case.

SCIA2324E

56. Remove seal rings from drum support.

SCIA3333E

57. Remove needle bearing from drum support edge surface.

SCIA2796E

Edition: 2004 August AT-304 2005 FX

 DISASSEMBLY

58. Remove reverse brake piston from transmission case with com-
pressed air. Refer to AT-287, "Oil Channel" . A
CAUTION:
Care should be taken not to abruptly blow air. It makes pis-
tons incline, as the result, it becomes hard to disassemble B
the pistons.

AT

G
SCIA5047E

59. Remove D-rings from reverse brake piston.

H

SCIA5340E
K
60. Use a pin punch (4mm dia. commercial service tool) to knock
out retaining pin.
L

SCIA2328E

61. Remove manual shaft retaining pin with nippers.

SCIA2329E

Edition: 2004 August AT-305 2005 FX

 DISASSEMBLY

62. Remove manual plate (with parking rod) from manual shaft.

SCIA5715E

63. Remove parking rod from manual plate.

SCIA5220E

64. Remove manual shaft from transmission case.

SCIA5716E

65. Remove manual shaft oil seals using a flat-bladed screwdriver.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch transmission case.

SCIA2331E

66. Remove detent spring and spacer from transmission case.

SCIA5248E

Edition: 2004 August AT-306 2005 FX

 DISASSEMBLY

67. Using snap ring pliers, remove snap ring from transmission
case. A

AT

SCIA2333E
D
68. Remove servo assembly (with return spring) from transmission
case.
E

G
SCIA5679E

69. Remove return spring from servo assembly. H

SCIA5717E K

70. Remove O-rings from servo assembly.

L

SCIA5719E

71. Remove parking actuator support from rear extension (2WD

models) or adapter case (AWD models).

SCIA3423E

Edition: 2004 August AT-307 2005 FX

 DISASSEMBLY

72. Remove parking pawl (with return spring) and pawl shaft from
rear extension (2WD models) or adapter case (AWD models).

SCIA3424E

73. Remove return spring from parking pawl.

SCIA2445E

74. Remove needle bearing from rear extension (2WD models) or

adapter case (AWD models).

SCIA5221E

75. Remove rear oil seal from rear extension (2WD models) or
adapter case (AWD models).
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch rear extension (2WD models) or
adapter case (AWD models).

SCIA5481E

Edition: 2004 August AT-308 2005 FX

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS PFP:00000

A
Oil Pump ACS0081M

COMPONENTS
B

AT

G
SCIA5323E

1. O-ring 2. Oil pump cover 3. O-ring

H
4. Oil pump housing 5. Oil pump housing oil seal

DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove oil pump housing from oil pump cover. I

SCIA6388E L

2. Remove oil pump housing oil seal using a flat-bladed screw-

driver.
M
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch oil pump housing.

SCIA2840E

Edition: 2004 August AT-309 2005 FX

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

3. Remove O-ring from oil pump housing.

SCIA2841E

4. Remove O-ring from oil pump cover.

SCIA5230E

ASSEMBLY
1. Install O-ring to oil pump cover.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse O-ring.

● Apply ATF to O-ring.

SCIA5230E

2. Install O-ring to oil pump housing.

CAUTION:
● Do not reuse O-ring.

● Apply ATF to O-ring.

SCIA2841E

Edition: 2004 August AT-310 2005 FX

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

3. Using the drift, install oil pump housing oil seal to the oil pump
housing until it is flush. A
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse oil seal.

● Apply ATF to oil seal. B

AT

SCIA5313E

D
4. Install oil pump housing to oil pump cover.
5. Tighten bolts to the specified torque in numerical order shown in
the figure after temporarily tightening them. E
: 9.0 N·m (0.92 kg-m, 80 in-lb.)

SCIA6388E

Edition: 2004 August AT-311 2005 FX

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

Front Sun Gear, 3rd One-Way Clutch ACS0081N

COMPONENTS

SCIA3114E

1. Front sun gear 2. 3rd one-way clutch 3. Snap ring

DISASSEMBLY
1. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove snap ring from front sun
gear.

SCIA3110E

2. Remove 3rd one-way clutch from front sun gear.

SCIA3111E

Edition: 2004 August AT-312 2005 FX

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

INSPECTION
3rd One-Way Clutch A
● Check frictional surface for wear or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the 3rd one-way clutch. B

Front Sun Gear Snap Ring

● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. AT
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the snap ring.
Front Sun Gear D
● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the front sun gear. E

ASSEMBLY
1. Install 3rd one-way clutch in front sun gear.
F
CAUTION:
Apply ATF to 3rd one-way clutch.
G

SCIA3111E
I
2. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, install snap ring in front sun
gear.
J

L
SCIA3110E

3. Check operation of 3rd one-way clutch. M

a. Hold oil pump assembly and turn front sun gear.
b. Check 3rd one-way clutch for correct locking and unlocking
directions.
CAUTION:
If not as shown in the figure, check installation direction of
3rd one-way clutch.

SCIA3131E

Edition: 2004 August AT-313 2005 FX

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

Front Carrier, Input Clutch, Rear Internal Gear ACS0081O

COMPONENTS

SCIA5426E

1. Seal ring 2. O-ring 3. Needle bearing

4. Bearing race 5. Front carrier assembly 6. Snap ring
7. Snap ring 8. Retaining plate 9. Driven plate
10. Input clutch drum 11. Drive plate 12. Rear internal gear

Edition: 2004 August AT-314 2005 FX

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

DISASSEMBLY
1. Compress snap ring using 2 flat-bladed screwdrivers. A
2. Remove front carrier assembly and input clutch assembly from
rear internal gear.
3. Remove front carrier assembly from input clutch assembly. B

AT

SCIA5339E
D

a. Remove bearing race from front carrier assembly.

E

SCIA2847E
H
b. Remove snap ring from front carrier assembly.
CAUTION:
Do not expand snap ring excessively. I

K
SCIA5476E

4. Disassemble input clutch assembly. L

a. Remove O-ring and seal rings from input clutch assembly.

SCIA5235E

Edition: 2004 August AT-315 2005 FX

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

b. Remove needle bearing from input clutch assembly.

SCIA2853E

c. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove snap ring from input

clutch drum.
d. Remove drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate from input
clutch drum.

SCIA2864E

INSPECTION
Front Carrier Snap Ring
● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the snap ring.
Input Clutch Snap Ring
● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the input clutch assembly.
Input Clutch Drum
● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage or burns.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the input clutch assembly.
Input Clutch Drive Plates
● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the input clutch assembly.
Input Clutch Retaining Plates and Driven Plates
● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the input clutch assembly.
Front Carrier
● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the front carrier assembly.
Rear Internal Gear
● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the rear internal gear assembly.

Edition: 2004 August AT-316 2005 FX

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

ASSEMBLY
1. Install input clutch. A
a. Install drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate in input
clutch drum.
CAUTION: B
Take care with order of plates.
b. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, install snap ring in input clutch
drum. AT

D
SCIA2864E

c. Install needle bearing in input clutch assembly. E

CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
F

SCIA2853E H

d. Install O-ring and seal rings in input clutch assembly.

CAUTION: I
● Do not reuse O-ring and seal rings.

● Apply ATF to O-ring.

● Apply petroleum jelly to seal rings. J

SCIA5235E

L
2. Install front carrier assembly.
a. Install snap ring to front carrier assembly.
CAUTION: M
Do not expand snap ring excessively.

SCIA5476E

Edition: 2004 August AT-317 2005 FX

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

b. Install bearing race in front carrier assembly.

CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race.
c. Install front carrier assembly to input clutch assembly.

SCIA2847E

3. Compress snap ring using 2 flat-bladed screwdrivers.

4. Install front carrier assembly and input clutch assembly to rear
internal gear.

SCIA5339E

Edition: 2004 August AT-318 2005 FX

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

Mid Sun Gear, Rear Sun Gear, High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub ACS0081P

COMPONENTS A

AT

SCIA2851E G
1. Needle bearing 2. Bearing race 3. Snap ring
4. High and low reverse clutch hub 5. Needle bearing 6. Snap ring
7. 1st one-way clutch 8. Rear sun gear 9. Seal ring H
10. Mid sun gear

DISASSEMBLY
I
1. Remove needle bearing and bearing race from high and low
reverse clutch hub.

L
SCIA2854E

2. Using snap ring pliers, remove snap ring from mid sun gear
assembly. M
CAUTION:
Do not expand snap ring excessively.

SCIA2855E

Edition: 2004 August AT-319 2005 FX

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

3. Remove high and low reverse clutch hub from mid sun gear
assembly.

SCIA2856E

a. Remove needle bearing from high and low reverse clutch hub.

SCIA2857E

4. Remove rear sun gear assembly from mid sun gear assembly.

SCIA2858E

a. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove snap ring from rear sun

gear.

SCIA2859E

Edition: 2004 August AT-320 2005 FX

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

b. Remove 1st one-way clutch from rear sun gear.

A

AT

SCIA4633E

D
5. Remove seal rings from mid sun gear.

G
SCIA2861E

INSPECTION H
High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub Snap Ring, Rear Sun Gear Snap Ring
● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
CAUTION: I
If necessary, replace the snap ring.
1st One-Way Clutch
J
● Check frictional surface for wear or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the 1st one-way clutch.
K
Mid Sun Gear
● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
CAUTION: L
If necessary, replace the mid sun gear.
Rear Sun Gear
● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. M
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the rear sun gear.
High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub
● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the high and low reverse clutch hub.

Edition: 2004 August AT-321 2005 FX

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

ASSEMBLY
1. Install seal rings to mid sun gear.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse seal rings.

● Apply petroleum jelly to seal rings.

SCIA2861E

2. Install 1st one-way clutch to rear sun gear.

CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to 1st one-way clutch.

SCIA4633E

3. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, install snap ring to rear sun

gear.

SCIA2859E

4. Install rear sun gear assembly to mid sun gear assembly.

SCIA2858E

Edition: 2004 August AT-322 2005 FX

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

5. Install needle bearing to high and low reverse clutch hub.

CAUTION: A
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.

AT

SCIA2857E

D
6. Install high and low reverse clutch hub to mid sun gear assem-
bly.
E

G
SCIA2856E

7. Using snap ring pliers, install snap ring to mid sun gear assem- H
bly.
CAUTION:
Do not expand snap ring excessively.
I

SCIA2855E
K
8. Check operation of 1st one-way clutch.
a. Hold mid sun gear and turn rear sun gear.
L
b. Check 1st one-way clutch for correct locking and unlocking
directions.
CAUTION:
If not as shown in the figure, check installation direction of M
1st one-way clutch.

SCIA3132E

9. Install needle bearing and bearing race to high and low reverse
clutch hub.
CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing and bearing race.

SCIA2854E

Edition: 2004 August AT-323 2005 FX

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

High and Low Reverse Clutch ACS0081Q

COMPONENTS
VQ35DE models

SCIA5223E

1. High and low reverse clutch drum 2. Driven plate 3. Retaining plate
4. Snap ring 5. Drive plate 6. Bearing race

VK45DE models

SCIA5224E

1. High and low reverse clutch drum 2. Driven plate 3. Retaining plate
4. Snap ring 5. Drive plate 6. Bearing race

Edition: 2004 August AT-324 2005 FX

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove bearing race from high and low reverse clutch drum. A

AT

SCIA5215E
D

2. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove snap ring from high and

low reverse clutch drum. E
3. Remove drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate from high
and low reverse clutch drum.
F

SCIA2868E

INSPECTION H
● Check the following, and replace high and low reverse clutch assembly if necessary.
High and Low Reverse Clutch Snap Ring I
● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
High and Low Reverse Clutch Drive Plates
● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. J

High and Low Reverse Clutch Retaining Plates and Driven Plates
● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. K
ASSEMBLY
1. Install drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate in high and low reverse clutch drum.
CAUTION: L
Take care with order of plates.
2. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, install snap ring in high and low
reverse clutch drum. M

SCIA2868E

Edition: 2004 August AT-325 2005 FX

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

3. Install bearing race to high and low reverse clutch drum.

CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race.

SCIA5215E

Edition: 2004 August AT-326 2005 FX

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

Direct Clutch ACS0081R

COMPONENTS A
VQ35DE models
B

AT

G
SCIA5046E

1. Direct clutch drum 2. Driven plate 3. Retaining plate

4. Snap ring 5. Drive plate H

VK45DE models
I

SCIA5226E

1. Direct clutch drum 2. Driven plate 3. Retaining plate

4. Snap ring 5. Drive plate

Edition: 2004 August AT-327 2005 FX

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

DISASSEMBLY
1. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove snap ring from direct
clutch drum.
2. Remove drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate from
direct clutch drum.

SCIA2868E

INSPECTION
● Check the following, and replace direct clutch assembly if necessary.
Direct Clutch Snap Ring
● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
Direct Clutch Drive Plates
● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.
Direct Clutch Retaining Plates and Driven Plates
● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.
ASSEMBLY
1. Install drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate in direct clutch drum.
CAUTION:
Take care with order of plates.
2. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, install snap ring in direct clutch
drum.

SCIA2868E

Edition: 2004 August AT-328 2005 FX

 ASSEMBLY

ASSEMBLY PFP:00000
A
Assembly (1) ACS0081S

1. As shown in the figure, use a drift [commercial service tool:

22mm (0.87in)dia.] to drive manual shaft oil seals into the trans- B
mission case until it is flush.
CAUTION:
● Apply ATF to manual shaft oil seals.
AT
● Do not reuse manual shaft oil seals.

SCIA5259E

E
2. Install detent spring and spacer in transmission case.
: 7.9 N·m (0.81 kg-m, 70 in-lb)
F

H
SCIA5248E

3. Install manual shaft to transmission case.

I

SCIA5716E
L
4. Install parking rod to manual plate.

SCIA5220E

Edition: 2004 August AT-329 2005 FX

 ASSEMBLY

5. Install manual plate (with parking rod) to manual shaft.

SCIA5715E

6. Install retaining pin into the manual plate and manual shaft.
a. Fit pinhole of the manual plate to pinhole of the manual shaft with a pin punch.
b. Use a hammer to tap the retaining pin into the manual plate.
CAUTION:
● Drive retaining pin to 2±0.5 mm (0.08±0.020in) over the
manual plate.
● Do not reuse retaining pin.

SCIA5297E

7. Install retaining pin into the transmission case and manual shaft.
a. Fit pinhole of the transmission case to pinhole of the manual shaft with a pin punch.
b. Use a hammer to tap the retaining pin into the transmission
case.
CAUTION:
● Drive retaining pin to 5±1 mm (0.20±0.04 in) over the
transmission case.
● Do not reuse retaining pin.

SCIA2427E

8. Install O-rings to servo assembly.

CAUTION:
● Do not reuse O-rings.

● Apply petroleum jelly to O-rings.

SCIA5719E

Edition: 2004 August AT-330 2005 FX

 ASSEMBLY

9. Install return spring to servo assembly.

A

AT

SCIA5717E

D
10. Install servo assembly in transmission case.

G
SCIA5679E

11. Using snap ring pliers, install snap ring to transmission case. H

SCIA2333E
K
12. Install D-rings in reverse brake piston.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse D-rings.
L
● Apply ATF to D-rings.

SCIA5340E

13. Install reverse brake piston in transmission case.

SCIA2325E

Edition: 2004 August AT-331 2005 FX

 ASSEMBLY

14. Install needle bearing to drum support edge surface.

CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.

SCIA2796E

15. Install seal rings to drum support.

CAUTION:
● Do not reuse seal rings.

● Apply petroleum jelly to seal rings.

SCIA3333E

16. Install spring retainer and return spring in transmission case.

SCIA2324E

17. Set the SST on spring retainer and install snap ring (fixing spring
retainer) in transmission case while compressing return spring.
CAUTION:
Securely assemble them using a flat-bladed screwdriver so
that snap ring tension is slightly weak.

SCIA5877E

Edition: 2004 August AT-332 2005 FX

 ASSEMBLY

18. Install reverse brake drive plates, driven plates and dish plate in
transmission case. A
CAUTION:
Take care with order of plates.
B

AT

G
SCIA5250E

19. Assemble N-spring.

H
20. Install reverse brake retaining plate in transmission case.

SCIA3179E

21. Install snap ring in transmission case.

SCIA2439E

Edition: 2004 August AT-333 2005 FX

 ASSEMBLY

22. Measure clearance between retaining plate and snap ring. If not
within specified clearance, select proper retaining plate.
Specified clearance “A”:
Standard: 0.7 - 1.1mm (0.028 - 0.043 in)
Retaining plate:
Refer to AT-354, "Reverse Brake" .

SCIA3129E

23. Install needle bearing to transmission case.

CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.

SCIA5031E

24. Install revolution sensor to transmission case.

CAUTION:
● Do not subject it to impact by dropping or hitting it.

● Do not disassemble.

● Do not allow metal filings, etc., to get on the sensor's

front edge magnetic area.
● Do not place in an area affected by magnetism.

: 5.8 N·m (0.59 kg-m, 51 in-lb)

SCIA2320E

25. As shown in the figure, use the drift to drive rear oil seal into the
rear extension (2WD models) or adapter case (AWD models)
until it is flush.
CAUTION:
● Apply ATF to rear oil seal.

● Do not reuse rear oil seal.

SCIA5477E

Edition: 2004 August AT-334 2005 FX

 ASSEMBLY

26. Install return spring to parking pawl.

A

AT

SCIA2445E

D
27. Install parking pawl (with return spring) and pawl shaft to rear
extension (2WD models) or adapter case (AWD models).
E

G
SCIA3424E

28. Install parking actuator support to rear extension (2WD models) H

or adapter case (AWD models).

SCIA3423E
K
29. Install needle bearing to rear extension (2WD models) or
adapter case (AWD models).
CAUTION: L
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.

SCIA5221E

30. Install seal rings to output shaft.

CAUTION:
● Do not reuse seal rings.

● Apply petroleum jelly to seal rings.

SCIA5209E

Edition: 2004 August AT-335 2005 FX

 ASSEMBLY

31. Install parking gear to output shaft.

SCIA5247E

32. Install output shaft in transmission case.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to mistake front for rear because both sides
looks similar. (Thinner end is front side.)

SCIA5030E

33. Install bearing race to output shaft.

SCIA5245E

34. Install rear extension assembly (2WD models) or adapter case assembly (AWD models) according to the
following procedures.
a. 2WD models
i. Apply recommended sealant (Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket
or equivalent. Refer to GI-49, "Recommended Chemical Prod-
ucts and Sealants" .) to rear extension assembly as shown in
the figure.
CAUTION:
Completely remove all moisture, oil and old sealant, etc.
from the transmission case and rear extension assembly
mounting surfaces.

SCIA5212E

Edition: 2004 August AT-336 2005 FX

 ASSEMBLY

ii. Install rear extension assembly to transmission case.

CAUTION: A
Insert the tip of parking rod between the parking pawl and
the parking actuator support when assembling the rear
extension assembly. B

AT

SCIA5029E

D
iii. Tighten rear extension assembly mounting bolts to specified
torque.
CAUTION: E
Do not reuse self-sealing bolt.
Rear extension assembly mounting bolt:
: 52 N·m (5.3 kg-m, 38 ft-lb) F

Self-sealing bolt:
: 61 N·m (6.2 kg-m, 45 ft-lb) G
SCIA3426E

b. AWD models
H
i. Install gasket onto transmission case.
CAUTION:
● Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc.
from the transmission case and adapter case assembly I
mounting surfaces.
● Do not reuse gasket.
J

SCIA5231E
K
ii. Install adapter case assembly to transmission case.
CAUTION:
Insert the tip of parking rod between the parking pawl and L
the parking actuator support when assembling the rear
extension assembly.
M

SCIA5186E

Edition: 2004 August AT-337 2005 FX

 ASSEMBLY

iii. Tighten adapter case assembly mounting bolts to specified

torque. (With bracket.)
CAUTION:
Do not reuse self-sealing bolt.
Adapter case assembly mounting bolt:
: 52 N·m (5.3 kg-m, 38 ft-lb)
Self-sealing bolt:
: 61 N·m (6.2 kg-m, 45 ft-lb)

SCIA5182E

35. Install needle bearing in drum support.

CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.

SCIA5198E

36. Install direct clutch assembly in reverse brake.

CAUTION:
Make sure that drum support edge surface and direct clutch
inner boss edge surface come to almost same place.

SCIA5019E

37. Install high and low reverse clutch assembly in direct clutch.

SCIA2306E

Edition: 2004 August AT-338 2005 FX

 ASSEMBLY

38. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, align drive plate.

A

AT

SCIA3169E

D
39. Install high and low reverse clutch hub, mid sun gear assembly
and rear sun gear assembly as a unit.
E

G
SCIA5018E

CAUTION: H
Check that portion “A” of high and low reverse clutch drum
protrudes approximately 2 mm (0.08 in) beyond portion “B”
of rear sun gear.
I

K
SCIA3130E

40. Install needle bearing in rear carrier assembly. L

CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
M

SCIA2803E

Edition: 2004 August AT-339 2005 FX

 ASSEMBLY

41. Install bearing race in rear carrier assembly.

CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race.

SCIA5175E

42. Install rear carrier assembly in direct clutch drum.

SCIA2462E

43. Install needle bearing (rear side) to mid carrier assembly.

CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.

SCIA2804E

44. Install needle bearing (front side) to mid carrier assembly.

CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.

SCIA2805E

45. Install mid carrier assembly in rear carrier assembly.

SCIA5017E

Edition: 2004 August AT-340 2005 FX

 ASSEMBLY

46. Install front carrier assembly, input clutch assembly and rear
internal gear as a unit. A

AT

SCIA5015E
D
47. Install seal rings in input clutch assembly.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse seal rings. E
● Apply petroleum jelly to seal rings.

G
SCIA2470E

48. Install band servo anchor end pin and lock nut in transmission H
case.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse band servo anchor end pin. I

SCIA6512E K

49. Install brake band in transmission case.

CAUTION: L
Assemble it so that identification to avoid incorrect installa-
tion faces servo side.

SCIA5498E

50. Install front sun gear to front carrier assembly.

CAUTION:
Apply ATF to front sun gear bearing and 3rd one-way clutch
end bearing.

SCIA5014E

Edition: 2004 August AT-341 2005 FX

 ASSEMBLY

51. Install needle bearing to front sun gear.

CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.

SCIA2808E

52. Adjust brake band tilting using clips so that brake band contacts
front sun gear drum evenly.

SCIA5033E

53. Adjust brake band.

a. Loosen lock nut.
b. Tighten band servo anchor end pin to specified torque.
: 5.0 N·m (0.51 kg-m, 44 in-lb)

c. Back of band servo anchor end pin three turns.

d. Holding band servo anchor end pin, tighten lock nut to specified
torque.
: 46 N·m (4.7 kg-m, 34 ft-lb)
SCIA5498E

Adjustment ACS0081T

TOTAL END PLAY

● Measure clearance between front sun gear and bearing race for
oil pump cover.
● Select proper thickness of bearing race so that end play is within
specifications.

SCIA2810E

Edition: 2004 August AT-342 2005 FX

 ASSEMBLY

1. Measure dimensions “K” and “L” and then calculate dimension

“J”. A

AT

SCIA5350E

D
a. Measure dimension “K”.

G
SCIA5351E

b. Measure dimension “L”. H

c. Calculate dimension “J”.
“J”: Distance between oil pump fitting surface of
transmission case and needle bearing mating surface I
of front sun gear.
J=K–L
J

SCIA5352E K
2. Measure dimensions “M1 ” and “M2 ” and then calculate dimen-
sion “M”.
L

SCIA3125E

a. Place bearing race and needle bearing on oil pump assembly.

SCIA3124E

Edition: 2004 August AT-343 2005 FX

 ASSEMBLY

b. Measure dimension “M1 ”.

SCIA3126E

c. Measure dimension “M2 ”.

SCIA3127E

d. Calculate dimension “M”.

“M”: Distance between transmission case fitting sur-
face of oil pump and needle bearing on oil pump.
M = M1 – M2

SCIA3125E

3. Adjust total end play “T1 ”.

T1 = J – M
Total end play “T1 ”:
0.25 - 0.55 mm (0.0098 - 0.0217 in)
● Select proper thickness of bearing race so that total end play
is within specifications.
Bearing races:
Refer to AT-354, "BEARING RACE FOR
ADJUSTING TOTAL END PLAY" . SCIA2810E

Edition: 2004 August AT-344 2005 FX

 ASSEMBLY

Assembly (2) ACS0081U

A
1. Install O-ring to oil pump assembly.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse O-ring.
B
● Apply ATF to O-ring.

AT

D
SCIA5172E

2. Install bearing race to oil pump assembly.

CAUTION: E
Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race.

3. Install oil pump assembly in transmission case. F

CAUTION:
Apply ATF to oil pump bearing.
G

SCIA2811E I

4. Apply recommended sealant (Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or

equivalent. Refer to GI-49, "Recommended Chemical Products
and Sealants" .) to oil pump assembly as shown in illustration. J
CAUTION:
Completely remove all moisture, oil and old sealant, etc.
From the oil pump mounting bolts and oil pump mounting K
bolt mounting surfaces.

SCIA5321E

5. Tighten oil pump mounting bolts to specified torque. M

CAUTION:
Apply ATF to oil pump bushing.
: 48 N·m (4.9 kg-m, 35 ft-lb)

SCIA2300E

Edition: 2004 August AT-345 2005 FX

 ASSEMBLY

6. Install O-ring to input clutch assembly.

CAUTION:
● Do not reuse O-ring.

● Apply ATF to O-ring.

SCIA5011E

7. Install converter housing to transmission case.

CAUTION:
Do not reuse self-sealing bolt.
Converter housing mounting bolt:
: 52 N·m (5.3 kg-m, 38 ft-lb)
Self-sealing bolt:
: 61 N·m (6.2 kg-m, 45 ft-lb)

SCIA3427E

8. Make sure that brake band does not close turbine revolution
sensor hole.

SCIA5034E

9. Install control valve with TCM.

a. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch con-
nector.

SCIA5449E

Edition: 2004 August AT-346 2005 FX

 ASSEMBLY

b. Install A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with

TCM. A

AT

SCIA5450E

D
c. Connect TCM connectors.

G
SCIA5447E

d. Install O-ring to A/T assembly harness connector. H

CAUTION:
● Do not reuse O-ring.

● Apply ATF to O-ring.

I

SCIA5155E
K
e. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.

SCIA5264E

f. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control

valve with TCM.
CAUTION:
Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve.
: 7.9 N·m (0.81 kg-m, 70 in-lb)

SCIA5301E

Edition: 2004 August AT-347 2005 FX

 ASSEMBLY

g. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case.

CAUTION:
● Make sure that turbine revolution sensor securely installs
turbine revolution sensor hole.
● Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so
as not to disturb installation of control valve with TCM.
● Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve
with TCM to terminal hole of transmission case.

SCIA5034E

● Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with

manual plate projection.

SCIA5035E

h. Install bolts A, B and C to control valve with TCM.

Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts
A 42 (1.65) 5
B 55 (2.17) 6
C 40 (1.57) 1

SCIA5025E

i. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. After

that tighten them in order (1 → 2 → 3), and then tighten other
bolts.
: 7.9 N·m (0.81 kg-m, 70 in-lb)

SCIA5037E

Edition: 2004 August AT-348 2005 FX

 ASSEMBLY

10. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.

A

AT

SCIA5023E

D
11. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid tempera-
ture sensor 2 harness with terminal clips.
E

G
SCIA5446E

12. Connect revolution sensor connector. H

SCIA5024E
K
13. Securely fasten revolution sensor 2 harness with terminal clips.

SCIA5293E

14. Pull down A/T assembly harness connector.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector.

SCIA5299E

Edition: 2004 August AT-349 2005 FX

 ASSEMBLY

15. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector.

SCIA5300E

16. Install magnets in oil pan.

SCIA5200E

17. Install oil pan to transmission case.

a. Install oil pan gasket to transmission case.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse oil pan gasket.

● Install it in the direction to align hole positions.

● Complete remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc. from oil pan gasket mounting surface.

b. Install oil pan (with oil pan gasket) to transmission case.

CAUTION:
● Install it so that drain plug comes to the position as
shown in the figure.
● Be careful not to pinch harnesses.

● Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc.

from oil pan gasket mounting surface.

SCIA2308E

c. Tighten oil pan mounting bolts to the specified torque in numeri-

cal order shown in the figure after temporarily tightening them.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse oil pan mounting bolts.
: 7.9 N·m (0.81 kg-m, 70 in-lb)

18. Install drain plug to oil pan.

CAUTION:
Do not reuse drain plug gasket.
: 34 N·m (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb) SCIA4113E

19. Install torque converter.

Edition: 2004 August AT-350 2005 FX

 ASSEMBLY

a. Pour ATF into torque converter.

● Approximately 2 liter (2-1/8 US qt, 1-3/4 Imp qt) of fluid is A
required for a new torque converter.
● When reusing old torque converter, add the same amount
of fluid as was drained. B

AT

SAT428DA

D
b. Install torque converter while aligning notches of torque con-
verter with notches of oil pump.
CAUTION: E
Install torque converter while rotating it.

G
SCIA5010E

c. Measure distance “A” to check that torque converter is in proper H

position.
Distance “A”
VQ35DE models: 25.0 mm (0.98 in) or more I
VK45DE models: 22.0 mm (0.87 in) or more

SAT017B
K

Edition: 2004 August AT-351 2005 FX

 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) PFP:00030

General Specifications ACS002S2

VQ35DE engine VK45DE engine

Applied model
2WD AWD
Automatic transmission model RE5R05A
Transmission model code number 92X20 92X21 92X22
Stall torque ratio 2.0: 1
1st 3.540
2nd 2.264
3rd 1.471
Transmission gear ratio
4th 1.000
5th 0.834
Reverse 2.370
Recommended fluid NISSAN Matic J ATF*1
Fluid capacity 10.3 liter (10-7/8 US qt, 9-1/8 Imp qt)
CAUTION:
●Use only Genuine Nissan Matic J ATF. Do not mix with other fluid.
● Using A/T fluid other than Genuine Nissan Matic J ATF will deteriorate in driveability and automatic transmission durabil-
ity, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the warranty.
*1: Refer to MA-12, "Fluids and Lubricants" .

Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs ACS002S3

2WD MODELS
Engine model VQ35DE
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
Throttle position
D1 →D2 D2 →D3 D3 →D4 D4 →D5 D5 →D4 D4 →D3 D3 →D2 D2 →D1
66 - 74 106 - 114 165 - 173 236 - 244 232 - 240 145- 153 89 - 97 41 - 49
Full throttle
(41 - 46) (66 - 71) (103 - 108) (147 - 152) (144 - 149) (90 - 95) (55 - 60) (25 - 30)
52 - 60 83 - 91 127 - 135 159 - 167 104 - 112 75 - 83 34 - 42 9 - 17
Half throttle
(32 - 37) (52 - 57) (79 - 84) (99 - 104) (65 - 70) (47 - 52) (21 - 26) (6 - 11)
● At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening.

AWD MODELS
Engine model VQ35DE
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
Throttle position
D1 →D2 D2 →D3 D3 →D4 D4 →D5 D5 →D4 D4 →D3 D3 →D2 D2 →D1
60 - 68 96 - 104 150 - 158 214 - 222 210 - 218 132 - 140 81 - 89 37 - 45
Full throttle
(37 - 42) (60 - 65) (93 - 98) (133 - 138) (130 - 135) (82 - 87) (50 - 55) (23 - 28)
47 - 55 75 - 83 115 - 123 144 - 152 95 - 103 68 - 76 31 - 39 9 - 17
Half throttle
(29 - 34) (47 - 52) (71 - 76) (89 - 94) (59 - 64) (42 - 47) (19 - 24) (6 -11)
● At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening.

Engine model VK45DE

Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
Throttle position
D1 →D2 D2 →D3 D3 →D4 D4 →D5 D5 →D4 D4 →D3 D3 →D2 D2 →D1
62 - 70 98 - 106 153 - 161 220 - 228 216 - 224 137 - 145 85 - 93 39 - 47
Full throttle
(39 - 43) (61 - 66) (95 - 100) (137 - 142) (134 - 139) (85 - 90) (53 - 58) (24 - 29)
29 - 37 59 - 67 101 - 109 161 - 169 108 - 116 66 - 74 38 - 46 22 - 30
Half throttle
(18 - 23) (37 - 42) (63 - 68) (100 - 105) (67 - 72) (41 - 46) (24 - 29) (14 - 19)
● At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening.

Edition: 2004 August AT-352 2005 FX

 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

Vehicle Speed at Which Lock-Up Occurs/Releases ACS002S4

2WD MODELS A
Engine model VQ35DE
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
Throttle position B
Lock-up ON Lock-up OFF
Closed throttle 65 - 73 (40 - 45) 62 - 70 (39 - 43)
Half throttle 196 - 204 (122 - 127) 153 - 161 (95 - 100) AT
● At closed throttle, the accelerator opening is less than 1/8 condition. (Closed throttle position signal: OFF)
● At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening.
D
AWD MODELS
Engine model VQ35DE
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) E
Throttle position
Lock-up ON Lock-up OFF
Closed throttle 59 - 67 (37 - 42) 56 - 64 (35 - 40)
F
Half throttle 178 - 186 (111 - 116) 139 - 147 (86 - 91)
● At closed throttle, the accelerator opening is less than 1/8 condition. (Closed throttle position signal: OFF)
● At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening. G

Engine model VK45DE

Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) H
Throttle position
Lock-up ON Lock-up OFF
Closed throttle 66 - 74 (41 - 46) 53 - 61 (33 - 38)
Half throttle 191 - 199 (119 - 124) 136 - 144 (85 - 89) I
● At closed throttle, the accelerator opening is less than 1/8 condition. (Closed throttle position signal: OFF)
● At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening.
J
Stall Speed ACS002S6

Engine model VQ35DE

K
Stall speed 2,300 - 2,600 rpm

Engine model VK45DE

L
Stall speed 1,950 - 2,250 rpm

Line Pressure ACS002S7

M
Line pressure [kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)]
Engine speed
R position D and M positions
At idle speed 425 - 465 (4.3 - 4.8, 62 - 67) 379 - 428 (3.9 - 4.4, 55 - 62)
At stall speed 1,605 - 1,950 (16.4 - 19.9, 233 - 283) 1,310 - 1,500 (13.3 - 15.3, 190 - 218)

A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor ACS00858

Name Condition CONSULT-II “DATA MONITOR” (Approx.) (V) Resistance (Approx.) (kΩ)
0°C (32°F) 2.2 15
A/T fluid temperature sensor 1 20°C (68°F) 1.8 6.5
80°C (176°F) 0.6 0.9
0°C (32°F) 2.2 10
A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 20°C (68°F) 1.7 4
80°C (176°F) 0.45 0.5

Edition: 2004 August AT-353 2005 FX

 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

Turbine Revolution Sensor ACS00859

Name Condition Data (Approx.)

Turbine revolution When running at 50 km/h (31 MPH) in 4th speed with the closed throttle position switch
sensor 1 “OFF”.
1.3 (kHz)
Turbine revolution When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH) in 1st speed with the closed throttle position switch
sensor 2 “OFF”.

Vehicle Speed Sensor A/T (Revolution Sensor) ACS0085A

Name Condition Data (Approx.)

Revolution sensor When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH). 185 (Hz)

Reverse Brake ACS0085B

Thickness mm (in) Part number*

4.2 (0.165) 31667 90X14
4.4 (0.173) 31667 90X15
Thickness of retaining plates 4.6 (0.181) 31667 90X16
4.8 (0.189) 31667 90X17
5.0 (0.197) 31667 90X18
5.2 (0.205) 31667 90X19
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.

Total End Play ACS0085C

Total end play mm (in) 0.25 - 0.55 (0.0098 - 0.0217)

BEARING RACE FOR ADJUSTING TOTAL END PLAY

Thickness mm (in) Part number*
1.2 (0.047) 31435 90X02
1.4 (0.055) 31435 90X03
1.6 (0.063) 31435 90X04
1.8 (0.071) 31435 90X05
2.0 (0.079) 31435 90X06
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.

Edition: 2004 August AT-354 2005 FX